CT Sytec Sytec I Series Advanced Diagnosics 2242063 PDF

Technical
Publications
2242063
Revision 1
CT Sytec/Sytec i Series
Advanced Diagnostics
Copyrighte 1999, 2002 by General Electric Company
Advanced Service Documentation

Property of GE
For GE Service Personnel Only
No Rights Licensed – Do Not Use or Copy
Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited
CT SYTEC/SYTEC i SERIES
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2242063
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
a
REV 0 2242063
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
b
REV 0 2242063
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained
should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to
place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to
assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
c
REV 0 2242063
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.
Devices not to be used near this equipment:
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an

d
REV 1 2242063
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

0 . . . . . . Apr. 6, 1999 . . . Initial release.
1 . . Decem. 24, 2002 . . . Added: Error Code (ER114, 438, 439)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV
Title page . . . . . . . . . 1 2–1 to 2–44 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–15 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–4 . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 5 (XG)
Title page rear . blank 3–1 to 3–26 . . . . . . . . 0 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–1 to 2–6 . . . . . . . . . 0 i.................. 0
a to d . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4–1 to 4–12 . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–16 . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 to 3–24 . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
A ................. 1 5–1 to 5–15 . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 to 3–14 . . . . . . . . 0 4–1 to 4–6 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–5 . . . . . . . . . 0
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–16 . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–1 to 4–8 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
i.................. 0 6–1 to 6–57 . . . . . . . . 1 A–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 6–58 . . . . . . . . . . blank A–2 . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 4 (DAS/Detector)
7–1 to 7–7 . . . . . . . . . 0 i.................. 0
Tab 1 (System) 7–8 . . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 3 (Table/Gantry) 1–1 to 1–8 . . . . . . . . . 0
1–1 to 1–3 . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 2 (OC) i.................. 0 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank Blank/Rear cover . . . –
A
blank 2242063
B
REV 0 2242063
CONTENTS
SYSTEM (TAB 1)
Introduction
Maintenance Program –Support–
Maintenance Program –Support Display–
Maintenance Program –Others–
Maintenance Program –Class C Software–
Message and Error Code Lists
Image Spatial Resolution
OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 2)
Power Up Sequence
Off–Line Test
ETC Board Test
LED Description
Appendix A
TABLE / GANTRY (TAB3)
LED and Switch Descriptions
TGP Power–On Test
TGP Off–Line Test
Servo Amp. and Servo Motor
DAS / DETECTOR (TAB4)
Detector Channel
Image Problems
X–RAY GENERATOR (TAB7)
Failure Analysis
i
blank 2242063
ii
REV 0 2242063
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Functions of Support Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2 OFF LINE SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-4 STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-5 ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2-6 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2-7 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
2-8 RAW DATA DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2-9 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
2-14 MTF SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLY – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-4 FILE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-5 START POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-6 RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-7 ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-8 MAGNIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3-9 PROFILE (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3-10 PROFILE (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3-11 HISTOGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3-12 NUMERICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3-13 WHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3-14 SET CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3-15 ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3-16 GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
i SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-3 POST RECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-4 MT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-5 OD SWEEPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-8 SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – CLASS C SOFTWARE – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5-2-4 Automated Post Recon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5-3-2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5-4 HEAT SOAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5-4-2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6-2-1 Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6-2-2 Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6-3 ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28
6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
6-3-3 Display Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41
6-3-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50
6-3-5 DMA Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51
6-3-6 RAWCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–52
6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–53
SECTION 7 – IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7-1 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7-2 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7-2-2 MTF Survey Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
ii SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
1-1 INTRODUCTION
This CT system provides the Power–on Test programs to intensify system failures. For this test, refer to the Operator
Console tab of this manual. The following sections describe how to use the service maintenance programs and error
codes.
D SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLAY
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS
SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – CLASS C SOFTWARE
These sections describe Maintenance Programs used during system service. These programs are used
to adjust and/or analyze the system.
D SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS
This section contains the system messages, alarm messages and error messages sent to the status dis-
play. These messages are used to analyze system failure.
1–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Section 2 ∼ 5 describe the functions of the service Maintenance Programs contained in the Maintenance Menu.
It includes the following programs:
9. SUPPORT
10. SUPPORT DISPLAY
11. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION
12. CT No. ADJUST
13. POST RECON
14. CUSTOM PARAMETERS
15. ME RECOVERY
16. OD SWEEPER
17. OD STUDY RECOVERY
18. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
19. SERVICE MODE
20. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.
1–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)
Operational Description
Ensure that ‘NEW PATIENT’ on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or plasma display screen blinks, and then touch the
‘Maintenance’ prompt until it inverts to black to display the Maintenance Menu.
*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

1. CALIBRATION
Select No. =
Insert the ‘BOOT’ disk into the floppy disk drive.
Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.

1. SUPPORT
2. SUPPORT DISPLAY
3. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION
4. CT No. ADJUST
5. POST RECON
6. CUSTOM PARAMETERS
7. MT RECOVERY
8. OD SWEEPER
9. OD STUDY RECOVERY
10. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
11. SERVICE MODE
12. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
Select No. =
Type the corresponding number and press Enter to start the program.
1–3 SYSTEM
blank 2242063
1–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

– SUPPORT –
2-1 GENERAL
2-1-1 Functions of Support Programs

The SUPPORT contains the following menus:
D OFF–LINE SCAN ––– Collects Scan raw data
D TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ––– On–line control of Table and Gantry
D STATISTICS ––– Data statistics
D ALIGNMENT ––– X–ray alignment
D CAL WITH MEAN FILE ––– Calculation between MEAN FILE #1 and MEAN FILE #2
D CAL WITH RAW DATA ––– Calculation between RAW DATA and MEAN FILE
D RAW DATA DIRECTORY ––– Shows the raw data information list of the system
D MEAN FILE DIRECTORY ––– Shows the mean file information list of the system
D FD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files
D MT DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files
D MOD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files
D WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
D MTF SURVEY ––– Calculates the image spatial resolution
2–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs

1. Select 1.(SUPPORT) from the Maintenance menu to display the following Support Menu:
*** SUPPORT MENU ***

1. OFF LINE SCAN
2. TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL
3. STATISTICS
4. ALIGNMENT
5. CAL WITH MEAN FILE
6. CAL WITH RAW DATA
7. RAW DATA DIRECTORY
8. MEAN FILE DIRECTORY
9. FD DUMP/LOAD
10. MT DUMP/LOAD
11. MOD DUMP/LOAD
12. WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
13. MTF SURVEY
Select No. =
2. Select an item from the menu. When you exit an item, this menu automatically reappears for the next selection.
Note
D When the software requires an entry, it either displays the most recently set parameter for that selection,
or a default parameter. Press [ENTR] to accept the displayed parameter.
D Press [END] key to terminate the current process and return (send) software control to a level one level
prior to (higher than) the terminated process.
When using a support program, press the [Cancel] key to directly return to the Support menu.
The following diagram lists software levels
NEW PATIENT BLINKING

Softkey
Prompt
END or Cancel
MAINTENANCE menu
Select:1
END or Cancel
SUPPORT menu
Select:1
END
KIND OF SCAN menu Cancel
Select:1
END
AXIAL: SCAN OR EDIT Cancel
D If you make an improper entry, the software displays the following message and waits for a valid input.
** INVALID ENTRY
2–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs (continued)

Note
D If a system error occurs, the software displays the following message and sends control one level higher,
to the prior level.
** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX

(Error Code)
D A raw data file created by a Support program has the following ID No.:
00 : 00000. XX. 01 ; 01
Station Study Series Image
Acquisition
Here XX: 1 ∼ 99. A raw data file can be selected by entering a Series number only, since the rest is pre–de-
termined as above.
D The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.
2–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-2 OFF LINE SCAN

This menu is used to perform off–line scans (axial, stationary, or scout) and collect raw data files.
A series No. must be specified every time an off–line scan is performed. If a new series No. is not specified every
time, the software will overwrite the existing file. It will not automatically update the series No., even if scan parameters
are modified.
Enter 1 (OFF LINE SCAN) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:
*** KIND OF SCAN ***

1. AXIAL
2. STATIONARY
3. SCOUT
Select No.=
Axial Scan
1. Enter 1 (AXIAL) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 1
*** AXIAL SCAN ***
SCAN TIME 2.7 sec (3.6sec in CT Sytec 2000i, S)
CW/CCW CW
THICKNESS 10.0 mm
SCAN FOV 25 cm
RECON FOV 25.0 cm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
kV 120 kV
mA 40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
This list contains either default scan parameters or previously selected parameters.
2–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-2 OFF LINE SCAN (continued)
Axial Scan (continued)

2. To modify the parameter, select 2 (EDIT).
Select No.= 2
SCAN TIME <1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>
( 2 )=
CW/CCW <1:CW, 2:CCW>
( 1 )=
THICKNESS <1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>
( 1 )=
SCAN FOV <1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>
( 1 )=
RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>
( 25.0 )=
XG, ROTOR <1:XG ON, 2:ROTOR ON, 3:BOTH OFF>
( 1 )=
mA <l:40mA, 2:60mA, 3:80mA, 4:100mA, 5:130mA, 6:160mA>
( 1 )
Note
The mA parameter only appears when XG ON is selected.
3. Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
4. Specify a Raw Data File ID No. (Series No.:1 ∼ 99; Study No. is fixed at ‘00000’.).
(Remember to change the series No. when acquiring multiple scans) Then, proceed to scan operation.
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

* Enter SERIES No. = 1
PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
The CRT either displays previously set scan parameters or default parameters.
Once you quit the Support Program, the scan parameters revert to the default values.
2–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Stationary Scan
1. Enter 2 (STATIONARY) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 2
*** STATIONARY SCAN ***
AZIMUTH Present Degree
SCAN TIME 2.7 sec
CW/CCW CW
THICKNESS 10.0 mm
SCAN FOV 25 cm
RECON FOV 25.0 cm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
kV 120 kV
mA 40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
The Gantry does not rotate during a stationary scan.

Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 and 355 degrees.
The 0 degrees position is equivalent to the X–ray tube at 12 o’clock; the 90 degrees position is equivalent to the
tube at the 3 o’clock position (viewed from Table).
The rest parameters are identical to the axial scan.
Select No.= 2
AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg] –1:Present deg>
( –1 )
SCAN TIME <1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec>
( 2 )=
CW/CCW <1:CW, 2:CCW>
( 1 )=
THICKNESS <1:10.0mm, 2:5.0mm, 3:3.0mm, 4:2.0mm, 5:1.0mm>
( 1 )=
SCAN FOV <1:25cm, 2:35cm, 3:42cm>
( 1 )=
RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2, ......41.9, 42.0 [cm]>
( 25.0 )=
( 1 )=
( 1 )
Note
2–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Stationary Scan (continued)

1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
* Enter SERIES No. = 1

PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
2–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Scout Scan
1. Enter 3 (SCOUT) in the ‘KIND OF SCAN’ menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.= 3
*** SCOUT SCAN ***
AZIMUTH 0 deg
TABLE 250 mm
THICKNESS 1.0 mm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
kV 120 kV
mA 40 mA
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=
The scout scan list contains parameters common to the axial scan, and, in addition, Azimuth and Table parame-
ters:
Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of 5 degrees between 0 degrees and 355
degrees.
Enter a Table travel parameter (scanned length) (between 50mm and 500mm: 1mm step).
Select No.= 2
AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .....350, 355 [deg] –1:Present deg>
( –1 )
TABLE <50, 51, 52, .....499, 500 [mm]>
( 250 )
( 1 )=
( 1 )
Note
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.= 1
2–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Scout Scan (continued)


* Enter SERIES No.= 1
5. Upon entering the Series No., the Gantry moves to the designated azimuth position.
Push the blinking SET button, and the Table will move for –20mm in the IN direction. Then push the blinking
START button and hold it until the scan is over; the Table will move in the OUT direction for the designated
travel plus +20mm.
Note
2–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL

On–line control of the Table and Gantry can be checked with this program by positioning the Table or Gantry to arbi-
trary positions. The Table is moved to an entered absolute position. The X–ray tube is moved to an entered azimuth
position (multiples of five degrees between 0 and .355 degrees).
Enter 2 (TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:
*** TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ***

1. TABLE CONTROL
2. GANTRY CONTROL
Select No.=
Table Control
1. Enter 1 (TABLE CONTROL) in ‘TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL’ menu to display the following TABLE CONTROL
parameters:
Select No.= 1
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< –765.0mm (IN) <–––> (OUT) 765.0mm > = 100
KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>
Press <ENTER> to Move
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< –765.0mm (IN) <–––> (OUT) 765.0mm > =
The above is an example where the Table is moved to the 100mm position. Enter values falling within the IN and
OUT limit values (–765.0mm and +765.0mm, in this example). The travel range (OUT–IN) is 1530mm.
When the required travel is 20mm or less, the following message does not appear but Table starts moving upon
pressing [ENTER].
KEEP PRESSING <TABLE SET>

Press <ENTER> to Move
2–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-3 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL (continued)
Gantry Control
Note
With this program, the Gantry rotates at the speed for a 1.8sec. When you select 2 or 3, you will have
to specify scan time.
1. Enter 2 (GANTRY CONTROL) in the ‘TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL’ menu to display the following GANTRY
CONTROL parameter:
Select No.= 2
*** GANTRY CONTROL ***
1. GANTRY POSITION
2. CW REST POSITION
3. CCW REST POSITION
Select No.=
2. To set the azimuth position, select 1 (GANTRY POSITION).
Select No.= 1
Enter GANTRY POSITION <0, 5, 10, ..., 355 DEG> =
3. To rotate the Gantry to CW/CCW rest position, select 2/3 (CW/CCW REST POSITION).
Select No.= 2(or 3)

Enter SCAN TIME
<1:1.8sec, 2:2.7sec, 3:4.5sec> =
2–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-4 STATISTICS
This program displays DAS data, including offset data, in decimal or hexadecimal numbers, with or without corrections
(offset file correction and/or reference channel correction), or performs arithmetic operations (average, Log, etc.) on
the raw data. You can store processed or unprocessed DAS data to MEAN file or RAW file.
Enter 3 (STATISTICS) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:
*** STATISTICS ***

Enter ID No.=
Enter ID No. (Series #) of the Raw data file to process.
Note
You can shorten the ID No. (STUDY #. SER #. ACQ #).
Example:
0.4.1 → 4
0.6.1 → 6
Enter ID No.= 0.4.1

STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATA & TIME
0000 04 01 H CW 2.7 000 +0 10.0 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:56
*** RAW DATA FORMAT ***
1.OFFSET AVERAGE
2.DAS DATA
3.FAN
Select No.=
2–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-4 STATISTICS (continued)
Offset Average
During each scan, the software collects 64 views of data (offset data) to obtain offset average data for each channel,
just before x–ray exposure starts. This program examines the offset average data, and the maximum or minimum
offset data and standard deviation data of each channel. You can also store this data to MEAN FILE.
1. Select 1 (OFFSET AVERAGE). The following screen appears.
*** OFFSET AVERAGE ***
MAX MAX +346.0000 XXX ch XX view
MIN +221.0000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +295.4994
MIN MAX +338.5000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +266.5227
MEAN MAX +340.5078 XXX ch
MIN +218.0781 XXX ch
AVE +281.0197
S.D. MAX +34.0549 XXX ch
MIN +0.4558 XXX ch
AVE +9.8788 XXX ch
*** KIND OF DATA ***

1.MAX
2.MIN
3.AVE
4.S.D.
Select No.=
‘OFFSET AVERAGE’ displays the following data, and channel and view No. that produced these data:
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MAX data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MIN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MEAN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) data of each channel.
Ch Ch
12 847
View1
Offset View ••••
View64
MAX jj
MIN jj ••••
MEAN jj
S.D. jj
2–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Offset Average (continued)

2. Select one of ‘KIND OF DATA’ item from the menu. Example: If you select 1 (MAX), the following screen appears.
Select No.= 1
** DISPLAY/FILING **
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=
a. DISPLAY:
This selection numerically displays the offset data foe each channel on the screen.
Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.
Select No.= 1
Select CHANNEL No.(1) =
Press [RTN] to see data from the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter
a channel number, and that channel’s data is displayed in the first line of the table followed by data from the
following channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL MAX DATA

0001 +313.5000 +236.5000 +319.0000 +278.0000
0005 +277.5000 +276.5000 +323.0000 +322.5000
0009 +320.5000 +320.0000 +326.5000 +326.5000
0013 +301.0000 +299.5000 +249.0000 +248.5000
.
.
.
0085 +288.5000 +291.5000 +297.5000 +297.5000
0089 +309.0000 +286.5000 +277.0000 +274.5000
0093 +284.5000 +284.0000 +284.0000 +284.0000
0097 +296.5000 +296.5000 +300.5000 +300.0000
Select CHANNEL No.(105) =
Note
The displayed channel Nos. correspond to as described below.
Ch.1 ∼ 635 : active channels
Ch.636 ∼ 679 : reference channels
2–14 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Offset Average (continued)

b. STORE:
This selection stores the offset data (MAX, MIN, MEAN, or S.D. data) to a MEAN file. The mean file takes the
form shown below:
1 ∼ 635 R1 ∼ R22 R23 ∼ R44
Where,
1 ∼ 635: offset data of active channels
R1 ∼ R44: offset data of reference channels
You can store up to 16 MEAN files. Enter a file No.(1 ∼ 16) and a comment (39 characters maximum).
Select 2 (STORE FILE) from the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> = 1
Enter COMMENT = MAX OF OFFSET
** STORE
** STORE END
2–15 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
DAS Data
This program displays DAS data transferred from the DAS to the IPU (via DAS Buffer Unit in DISP), with no data
correction (offset file correction or reference channel correction) applied to the data. Special floating point hexadeci-
mal numbers are displayed for each channel, or for each view, with the channel and view numbers indicating the trans-
fer sequence. It also displays Offset data. Refer to the Note followed.
1. Select 2 (DAS DATA) from the ‘RAW DATA FORMAT’ menu.
2. Enter 1 (VIEW) to display the channel data on a selected view, or 2 (CHANNEL) to display the view data on a
selected channel.
Select No.= 2
*** DAS DATA ***
1.VIEW
2.CHANNEL
Select No.= 1
Enter VIEW No.= 100
** START
Enter CHANNEL No.(1) =
3. Press [RTN] to display blocks of data, as shown below. Each block consists of 31 data. Each view contains 22
blocks. To see subsequent channel data, enter a channel number, and that channel’s data is displayed in the
first line of the table, followed by data from the following channels. The number in parentheses is the default num-
ber.
CHANNEL VIEW No.= 0100

0001 00E0 04C1 086A 08FF 09E8 0A94 0C6B 138F
0009 140B 1483 1550 1620 176F 188B 1A45 1B6E
0017 1DE3 23EE 24AC 25BE 2615 273F 2835 28FD
.
.
.
0180 2D85 2DE6 2E2F 2DC2 2C1E 2CD7 2BD3
0187 29C7 290B 27E2 26FE 2603 255B 245B 23C4
0195 1D3A 1AB3 1989 17DE 1703 1632 1524 1468
Enter CHANNEL No.(203) =
4. Press [END] to return to ‘Enter VIEW No.=’ to select and see channel data from different view.
ENTER CHANNEL No.(203) = END

End of display
Enter VIEW No.=
2–16 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
DAS Data (continued)

Note
D Data format (Special floating–point)
a1 a0 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DAS Count = 2N Σ bi x 2i (bi: ‘0’ or ‘1’)
a1 a0 N
0 0 –1
0 1 1
1 0 3
1 1 5
Example (540B)16 = (01 01 0100 0000 1011)2

= 21 x (1 x 163 +4 x 162 +0 x 16 + 11)
= (10262)10
D The displayed channel and view numbers only indicate the transfer sequence of DAS data; they are not
the real channel or view numbers.
682 pieces of data are transferred during one view period.
(682 = 31 channels (1 block) x 22 (triggers))
D The offset view numbers and active view numbers are as follows:
View 1 ∼ 65: offset views (one dummy view + 64 views)
View 66 ∼ 714: active views (one dummy view + 648 views)
2–17 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
FAN
This selection displays raw data in decimal numbers with or without applying corrections (offset file correction and/or
reference channel correction) and/or arithmetic operation (natural logarithm) to DAS data.
The channel numbers displayed correspond to the DAS or Detector channel numbers as described below:
Ch.1 ∼ 635 : active channels

Ch.636 ∼ 679 : reference channels
You can store the processed or unprocessed raw data to a MEAN file or RAW file.
1. Select 3 (FAN) from the ‘RAW DATA FORMAT’ menu and choose whether or not to apply corrections or conver-
sion to the data.
Select No.= 3
*** OPERATION SELECT ***
OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:NO> (2)=
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=
Note
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:22block, 2:No>
6ch: Performs the reference channel correction using the mean of data of Ch.1 ∼ 3, Ch.633 ∼ 635.
22 block: Performs the reference channel correction using the normal reference channel data.
** START
MAX MAX +30376.000000 XXX ch XX view
MIN +1001.500000 XXX.ch XX view
AVE +10700.650000
MIN MAX +28112.000000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +9979.113000
MEAN MAX +29012.460000 XXX ch
MIN +962.605900 XXX ch
AVE +10256.390000
S.D. MAX +981.421200 XXX ch
MIN +6.808363 XXX ch
AVE +153.021000
*** KIND OF DATA ***

1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=
2–18 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
FAN (continued)
The system displays the following data after calculations:
Ch Ch
12 679
View65
Active View ••••
View712
MAX jj
MIN jj ••••
MEAN jj
S.D. jj
2–19 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
FAN (continued)
2. Select Kind of Data.
ORIGINAL displays the channel data for a certain view, or displays the view data for a certain channel.
MAX, MIN, MEAN and S.D. display the maximum, minimum, mean, and S.D. data of each channel.
The following describes the procedures for each data.
1.ORIGINAL:
a. DISPLAY:
*** DISPLAY/FILING ***
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
*** DISPLAY ***
1. VIEW
2. CHANNEL
Select No.= 1
Enter VIEW No.= 10
Enter CHANNEL No.(1)=
CHANNEL VIEW No.= 010
0001 +311.000000 +234.000000 +318.000000 +274.500000
0005 +276.000000 +275.000000 +273.000000 +322.000000
0009 +318.000000 +319.000000 +269.000000 +325.000000
.
.
.
0093 +308.500000 +285.500000 +276.500000 +273.000000
0097 +272.000000 +285.500000 +274.500000 +273.000000
0101 +245.000000 +295.500000 +295.500000 +299.000000
Enter CHANNEL No.(105)=
b. STORE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter RAW FILE No.<1–3> 3
** START
** STORE END
Ch Ch Ch
1 635 R44
View1
View64 Offset Data
View65
Active Data
1 ∼ 635: active channels
View712 R1 ∼ R44 (636 ∼ 679): reference channels
2–20 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
FAN (continued)
2.MAX:
Note
MIN, MEAN, S.D. menus are similar to this MAX menu.
a. DISPLAY

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
Select Channel No.(1) = ‘CR’
CHANNEL MAX DATA
0001 +1712.000000 +1606.500000 +1646.000000 +1643.500000
0005 +1630.500000 +1595.500000 +1716.000000 +1722.000000
.
.
.
0096 +1930.000000 +1870.000000 +2046.000000 +1916.000000
0097 +2004.000000 +1972.000000 +2038.000000 +2018.000000
0101 +2084.000000 +2058.000000 +2086.000000 +2116.000000
Select CHANNEL No.(105)=
b. STORE:

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter COMMENT = MAX DATA OF CHANNEL
** START
** STORE END
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
2–21 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-5 ALIGNMENT
This menu is used to center the phantoms and check or adjust X–ray alignment. Three programs are available for
X–ray check/adjustment procedures: GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, and FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL. The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program aligns the X–ray tube to the Detector. The FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL program checks/adjusts filter alignment to the Detector.
You can display the calculated center channels at each view (1 ∼ 648) on the screen or store them to MEAN FILE
(No.1 ∼ 16).
Enter 4 (ALIGNMENT) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the following menu:
*** ALIGNMENT ***

1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE
2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL
3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL
4. PHANTOM CENTERING
Select No.=
2–22 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-5 ALIGNMENT (continued)
Gravity SAG Amplitude

For this procedure, the gravity pin is attached to the X–ray tube collimator during axial scans. This program measures
fluctuations of the projection of the pin onto the Detector to check for abnormalities of the rotating mechanism (bend,
vibrations, etc.).
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2,Off–Line Scan), following the instructions described below:
1. Air File:
Remove the Bow–tie filter from the collimator, and scan air. Record the series No.
(Scan Parameters:1.8sec / CW / 10mm / 120kV / 40mA (2.7sec:CT Sytec, 3000i / 3.6sec:CT Sytec 2000i, S))
2. POC File (Pin on Collimator):

Remove the Bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Attach the SAG alignment pin to the collimator. Scan the pin,
and record the series No.
3. Select 1 (GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and POC Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 1
RAW DATA FILE (POC)
Enter ID No.= 2
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTING
The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results:
** START
CENTER CH. = aaa.aaa
AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx
aaa.aaa : 1/2 x (Maximum center channel No. in all views + Minimum center channel No. in all views)
xxx.xxx : Average of center channel numbers at each view
5. You can display the center channels at each view or store them in the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.
2–23 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
ISO Center Channel

The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program determines the center channel of the Detector which receives the projection
of a pin placed in the reconstruction area. The system determines the center channel at each view, then calculates
the average center channel and displays it along with instructions to shift the X–ray tube into proper alignment. Shift
the X–ray tube tangentially to the rotation circle. The correct ISO center channel is 317.75 Ch.
The adjustment tolerance is ± 0.02 Ch. Perform four off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following the
instructions described below:
1. Air File:
2. Pin File:
Remove the Bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Place a steel pin (6mm in diameter) about 5cm off the center
of reconstruction area. Scan the pin, and record the series No.
3. Select 2 (ISO CENTER CHANNEL) from ‘Alignment’ menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Pin Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 3
RAW DATA FILE (PIN)
Enter ID No.= 4
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTING
** START
ISO AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 ± 0.02)
MOVE TUBE C.CCC MM RIGHT
XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.
5. With the tube at the Gantry 12 o’clock position, move the tube right or left, if viewed from the Table for C.CCCmm,
according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the Iso center channel equals 317.75 ± 0.02Ch.
2–24 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Filter Center Channel

The FILTER CENTER CHANNEL program measures the center channel receiving the projection of the filter onto the
Detector. The software measures the center channel for each view, then calculates and displays the average center
channel along with instructions to shift the filter into proper alignment. The correct filter center channel equals the iso
center channel: 317.75Ch. The adjustment tolerance is ± 0.3Ch. Shift the filter tangentially to the rotation circle.
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following the instructions below:
1. Air File:
2. Filter File:
Install the Bow–tie filter, and scan air. Record the series No.
3. Select 3 (FILTER CENTER CHANNEL) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Filter Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.= 3
RAW DATA FILE (FILTER)
Enter ID No.= 5
** START
FILTER AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75 ± 0.30)
MOVE FILTER D.DDD MM RIGHT
XXX.XXX: Average of center channels for each view.
5. With the tube at the Gantry 12 o’clock position, move the filter right or left, if viewed from the Table for D.DDDmm,
according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the filter center channel equals 317.75 ± 0.3Ch.
2–25 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Phantom Centering
The PHANTOM CENTERING program centers the phantoms on the scan plane. After calculating actual phantom
position, software instructs you to shift the phantom to center it. Shift the phantom right or left and up or down (viewed
from the Table).
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-2, Off–Line Scan), following the instructions below:
1. Air File:
Bow–tie filter installed. Scan air, and record the series No.
2. Phantom File:
Bow–tie filter installed. Scan phantom, and record the series No.
3. Select 4 (PHANTOM CENTERING) from the ‘Alignment’ menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Phantom Files. (ID No. = Series No.)
*** PHANTOM CENTERING ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR [CW])
Enter ID No.= 6
RAW DATA FILE (PHANTOM [CW])
Enter ID No.= 7
** START
MOVE DOWN e.ee MM (± 0.15)
MOVE RIGHT f.ff MM (± 0.15)
*** ALIGNMENT ***
1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE
2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL
3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL
4. PHANTOM CENTERING
Select No.=
5. Move the phantom up or down (according to the instruction) for e.ee mm and left or right (viewed from the Table)
for f.ff mm. Repeat the procedure until instructed to move the phantom 0.0 (± 0.15mm).
2–26 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
Display/Filing
The DISPLAY/FILING menu displays or stores the center channels at each view calculated in the GRAVITY SAG
AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, or FILTER CENTER CHANNEL programs to MEAN FILE (No.1 ∼ 16).
The following menu appears after the calculations:

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
An example for DISPLAY and STORE FILE:

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 1
Select VIEW No. (1)=
Enter a view No.

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= 2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No. <1–16>= 1
Enter COMMENT = CENTER CH OF ISO
** STORE END
2–27 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-6 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) between Mean files, or ap-
plies some filters to a Mean file. Create Mean files with OFFSET AVERAGE, FAN (except for ORIGINAL), and ALIGN-
MENT (except for PHANTOM CENTERING) programs. The ALIGNMENT Mean file consists of each view’s channel
number, so calculations may not be performed between the ALIGNMENT file and the ordinary Mean file. The program
also displays Mean file data, the calculation results, and stores the calculation results to Mean file.
Enter 5 (CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE) in the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:
** CALUCLATION WITH MEAN FILE **

1. FILE 1 + FILE 2
2. FILE 1 – FILE 2
3. FILE 1 * FILE 2
4. FILE 1 / FILE 2
5. DIFFERENTIAL FILTER
6. LOW PASS FILTER
7. HIGH PASS FILTER
8. DISPLAY
Select No.=
Example: Choose 1 (FILE1 + FILE2) and software performs the following calculation:
AC = EC +FC, where
EC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 1
FC : Data of Ch. C in Mean File 2
AC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C : Ch. No. Ch.1 ∼ 635 active channels
Ch.636 ∼ 679 reference channels
A680 ∼ A1024 : do not care
2–28 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-6 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE (continued)
Menu No. 1, 2, 3, 4
1. Enter Mean File No.
*** MEAN FILE SELECTION

SELECT MEAN FILE No.<1–16> AS FILE 1
Enter MEAN FILE No.= 1
SELECT MEAN FILE No. <1–16> AS FILE 2
Enter MEAN FILE No.= 2
The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.
Menu No. 5, 6, 7
1. Enter Mean File No.
***MEAN FILE SELECTION ***

Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>_
The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the ‘DISPLAY/FILING’ menu.
Note
D When you select 5 (DIFFERENTIAL FILTER), the system performs the following calculation:
DC = EC+1 – EC, where

EC : Data of Ch. C in the selected Mean file
DC : Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C : Ch. No.
D Menu No. 6, 7: These are used in the YMS Manufacturing only.
Display/Filing
DISPLAY : Displays most recent calculations, or any mean file data.
FILING : Stores the calculations to a mean file.

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=
2–29 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-7 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division) between a mean file and
a raw data file. Up to three raw data files (numbered 1, 2, 3) can be stored in the Support program.
Select 6 (CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA) from the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:
*** CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA ***

1. RAW + FILE
2. RAW + FILE
3. FILE – RAW
4. RAW * FILE
5. RAW / FILE
6. FILE / RAW
For example, RAW + FILE is selected, calculations illustrated below are performed.
Illustration 2–3 File Formats
RAW DATA FILE CALCULATED FILE

Ch Ch
1 679
View 1
Offset Data Ch Ch
View 64 1 679
View 65 View 1
DV,C EV,C
V : 1 ∼ 712 V : 1 ∼ 648
C : 1 ∼ 679 C : 1 ∼ 679
View 712 View 648
Mean File EV, C = DV + 64, C + MC, where

MC V : View number 1 ∼ 648
C:1∼679 C : Channel number 1 ∼ 679
2–30 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-7 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA (continued)

1. Select a kind of operation and enter Mean File No. and Raw Data File No.
Select No.= 1
Enter RAW DATA FILE No.<1–3> _
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16> _
The following data are shown after calculation:
Ch Ch
12 679
View65
Active View ••••
View712
MAX jj
MIN jj ••••
MEAN jj
S.D. jj
Then, ‘KIND OF DATA’ menu appears:
** KIND OF DATA **
1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=
2. For the subsequent procedures, refer to ‘KIND OF DATA’ in Section 2-4, FAN. This menu displays the calculated
file or saves it to a RAW FILE or MEAN FILE.
2–31 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-8 RAW DATA DIRECTORY

This menu displays a raw data file directory. Each raw data file is displayed with scan parameter information, STUDY
No., SERIES No., ACQUISITION No. and DATE and TIME. Raw data files are listed in chronological order, with the
most recently scanned file at the top of the list.
Select 7 (RAW DATA DIRECTORY) from the ‘Support’ menu.
STUDY SER ACQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA DATE & TIME
00000 03 01 H CW 2.7 000 00 10 25 120 040 1992/07/01 15:22:05
Series No. Head/Feet Scan Time Vale of 25 160 Date and Time of Scanning
First 1.8 Table 35 130 yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss
2.7 Movement 42 100
4.5 (mm) 80
Study No. Acquisition Scan Type 1 10 120 60
No. AP 5 5 40
LT : 3
AZ 355 1
CW
CCW
Press [RTN] to continue.

Or press [END] to end.
2–32 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-9 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY

Select 8 (MEAN FILE DIRECTORY) to display the directory of mean files and warm–up work files.
MEAN FILE
No COMMENT DATE & TIME
1 1994/09/10 16:55:44
2 1994/09/10 15:02:54
3 1994/09/05 18:51:25
4 MAX DATA OF CHANNEL 1994/09/09 20:55:12
5 WITHOUT FILTER. WITH OFFSET CORR. 1994/09/29 21:23:42
6 001 CAL 1994/09/28 11:14:12
7 WARM UP SD 1994/19/14 12:58:36
8 1994/09/06 13:37:10
WARM UP WORK FILE
No DATE & TIME
1 1994/10/09 10:10:10
2 1994/10/09 10:30:33
Press <END> to END
You can store up to 16 mean files in the SUPPORT program, numbered 1 to 16.
2–33 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from the hard DISK to FD, or loads a raw data file from FD to the hard disk. Inset
a floppy disk in the FD unit (it takes two floppy disks to store one raw data file).
Select 9 (FD DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu. Enter the ID No. The following menu appears:
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (FD) ***

1. DUMP (DISK –> FD)
2. LOAD (FD –> DISK)
Select No.= _
Dump (from Disk to FD)

Note
Verify that the floppy disk to be used is write–enabled before starting to dump.
The example below shows a raw data file of ID No. 20.1.4 (Study#:20, Ser#:1, Acq#:4) is dumped to two floppy disks.
Select No.= 1
PRESS <END> TO END
Enter ID No.= 20.1.4
** DUMP START
1. After you enter the ID No., software initialized the floppy disk with VOLUME name ‘FRAW’ and USER No. 0, and
then starts the dump procedure with File name FRAW:0...RAW DATA n VR(n=0, 1, 2......).
Note
If the FD is protected for write, the following message is displayed:
** FD NOT READY
After Inserting FD, Press <ENTR>
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> (Insert the second floppy disk)
** DUMP START
**DUMP COMPLETE
2. When the floppy disk becomes full, the CRT displays, ‘After Inserting Another FD, press <ENTR>’.
Continue to Dump? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
3. If you want to continue the dump procedure, enter 0(Yes).
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> _
4. Replace the current floppy disk with another one, or the current floppy disk will be overwritten.
2–34 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-10 FD DUMP/LOAD (continued)
Load (from FD to Disk)

The example below shows that a raw data file occupying two floppy disks is loaded to Series No. 44
(Study#:0, Ser#:44, Acq#:1, Image#:1).
1. Insert the raw data floppy disk into the FD unit.
2. Enter Series No. (Station#:0, Study#:0, Acq#:1, Image#:1) (The raw data file is contained on two floppy disks.)
*** RAW DATA LOAD FROM FD ***

PRESS <END> TO END
Enter SERIES No.= 44
** LOAD START
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>

** LOAD START
** LOAD COMPLETE
Continue to Load ? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
Note
D If the current floppy disk does not have VOLUME name ‘RRAW’, the following message appears:
** ILLEGAL FD VOLUME ID = XXXX

D If the File name is the floppy disk is not right, the message below appears:
** ILLEGAL FILE NAME

2–35 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from DISK to MT, or loads raw data files from MT to DISK.
Select 10 (MT DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu. The following menu appears:
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MT) **

1. DUMP ( DISK → MT )
2. LOAD ( MT → DISK )
Select No.= _
Dump (from Disk to MT)

Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY) and TAPE is not protected.
1. Select 1 (DUMP). The following menu appears:
*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MT) ***

1. APPEND
2. REWRITE
2. Select 1.APPEND or 2.REWRITE.
APPEND : Writes data after the existing data on Mag tape (does not write over existing data)
REWRITE : Writes data from the beginning of Mag tape (writes over existing data on Mag tape)
3. The example below shows:

A raw data file of ID No.3 (Ser#:3) on DISK is dumped to FILE No.0 on MT.
(MT file numbers can not be arbitrarily assigned; they should be 0, 1, 2,... from the beginning of Mag tape.)
4. Enter ID No. (Ser#).
Select No.= 2
** FILE No.= 0
Enter IN No.= 3
** FILE No.= 1
Enter ID No.= (<END>)
Dump start OK? <0:OK, 1:No> 0
** DUMPED FILE No.= 0
** FILE No.= 0
Enter ID No.= _
2–36 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-11 MT DUMP/LOAD (continued)
Load (from MT to Disk)

Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY).
1. Select 2 (LOAD).
2. Select MT START FILE No.
3. The example below shows:

A FILE No.0 on MT is loaded to Series No.30 (Station#:0, Study#:0, Ser#:30, Acq#:1, Image#:1).
The software waits for the input of a Series No.(destination) for the next File No.1 on MT.
Note
The File No. displayed thereafter automatically increases by 1 every time a new file is loaded.
*** LOAD (FROM MT TO DISK) ***

Enter MT START FILE No.= 0
** FILE No.= 0
Enter SERIES No.= 30
** FILE No.= 1
Enter SERIES No. = (<END>)
Load start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0
*** LOADED SERIES No.= 30
** FILE No.= 1
Enter SERIES No.= _
2–37 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD

This function dumps raw data files from DISK to MOD, or loads raw data files from MOD to DISK.
Insert a magnetic optical disk in the MoD unit.
Select 11 (MOD DUMP/LOAD) from the ‘Support’ menu.
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **

1. DUMP (DISK –> MOD)
2. LOAD (MOD –> DISK)
3. DIRECTORY
4. INITIALIZE
Select No.=
Dump (from Disk to MOD)

Note
Verify that the magnetic optical disk is write enables.
1. Select 1 (DUMP). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MOD) ***

Volume Name = XXXX
The file No. (0, 1, 2,...) on the MOD are displayed, where raw data files will be dumped.
** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***

** FILE No.= XX
Enter ID No. [00:00000.01.01;01] = _
2. Enter the ID No. of the raw data file, and then the file No. is updated, waiting for another file ID No. By pressing
<END>, the dump procedure starts with the following message.
Dump Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0

** DUMP STAR
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
:
:
** XX Files dumped **
Software stars the dump procedure with File name ORAW:0...RAWn. VR(n=0, 1, 2,....=FILE No.).
2–38 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)
Load (from MOD to Disk)

1. Insert the magnetic optical disk into the MOD unit.
2. Select 2 (LOAD). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** LOAD (FROM MOD TO DISK) ***

volume Name = xxxx
3. Enter the file No. (0, 1, 2, ...) within the MOD, from which the raw data will be loaded onto the hard disk.
Enter MOD START FILE No.= _

** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No.= XX
Enter SERIES No.= _
4. Enter the Series No. of the raw data file (the ID No. of the raw data files which will be loaded onto the disk are
0:0.XX.1;1 (Sta:Std.Ser.Acq;Img, i.e., other than the Series No. are fixed)). The file No. is updated, waiting for
another file Series No. By pressing [END], the load procedure starts with the following message.
Load Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0

** LOAD START
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
:
:
** XX Files loaded **
2–39 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-12 MOD DUMP/LOAD (continued)
Directory
1. To display the raw data file directory on the MOD, select 3 (DIRECTORY).
** RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY **

FILE# STUDY SER AQ HF STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME
0 12345 01 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:56
1 12345 02 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:44:56
2 12345 03 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:54:56
. .
. .
Initialize
1. To initialize a MOD, select 4 (INITIALIZE). The volume name of the present MOD is displayed.
** MOD INITIALIZE (RAW DATA ONLY) **

Volume Name = XXXX
Initialize OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> _
Note
The MOD is initialized with volume name ‘ORAW’.
2–40 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

This program performs the same scan and data checks as the Warm–up scan sequence. The parameter ranges
described below are checked:
1. Enter 12 (Warm Up Error Analysis) in the ‘Support’ menu to display the (warm–up) scan parameter shown below:
*** WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS ***

–– AXIAL SCAN ––
SCAN TIME 4.5 sec
THICKNESS 10 mm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
KV 120 kV
MA 40 mA
CW/CCW CCW
NO. OF SCAN 1
2. Press the guide lamps ([SET] and [START]) to perform the scan.
The results of data checks are shown as below:
REF CH. XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX R1 ∼ 22
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX R23 ∼ 44
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX (MIN=9000)
XXXX XXXX (MAX=5000)
RATIO MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch
MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.90)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=1.10)
HIGHPASS MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch
MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=–0.01)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=+0.01)
S.D. MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch
MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.00)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=0.02)
The values in parentheses are the tolerances. If some channels give the same MAX or MIN values, the smallest
channel number is shown.
2–41 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-13 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS (continued)

3. You can examine each channel’s calculated data (Ratio, Highpass, and S.D.) displayed on the screen, and store
the data to a mean file. Select a type of calculated data you want to examine.
** KIND OF DATA ***

1. RATIO
2. HIGHPASS
3. S.D.
Select No.= 1
** DISPLAY/FILING**
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.= _
a. DISPLAY:
This selection shows each channel’s calculated data on the screen. Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the ‘DISPLAY/
FILING’ menu.
Select No.= 1
Select CHANNEL No.(1) = _
Press [RTN] to see data of the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter a
channel number, and that channel’s data is shown in the first line of the table, followed by data of the following
channels. The number is parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL RATIO
0001 +0.9991 +0.9994 +1.0003 +0.9989
0005 +1.0001 +1.0000 +1.0000 +0.9991
0097 +1.0000 +1.0000 +1.0004 +1.0000

0101 +1.0001 +.09999 +1.0001 +1.0001
Select cHANNEL No.(105) = _
b. STORE FILE:
This selection stores the calculated data to a mean file. Enter a file No. (1 ∼ 16) and a comment (40 characters
maximum).
Select No.= 2
** STORE FILE **
Enter COMMENT = WARM UP RATIO
** STORE END
2–42 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-14 MTF SURVEY

The MTF SURVEY menu calculated MTF data from an image of a wire embedded in the QA phantom. In this menu,
store the calculated data to a mean file, and analyze it using the Support Display.
Before entering this menu, scan a wire in the QA phantom, reconstruct using an appropriate algorithm you wish to
examine, view the image, and use ‘Report Cursor’ to note the wire center values.
1. Enter Image ID No.
** MTF SURVEY **
Enter IMAGE ID <XX:XXXXX.XX.XX;XX> = _
If there is not an image of the ID entered, the following message is displayed:
** IMAGE NOTHING
2. Enter the wire center values. The values should have been noted with using the ‘Report Cursor’ function.
WIRE CENTER X (Pixel)= _

WIRE CENTER Y (Pixel)= _
3. Enter the area size (default: 32).
AREA SIZE <8/16/32/64/128 (pixel)> (32)= _
Use ‘Set Cursor’ to confirm that the designated area does not overlay phantom edges. If the entered value is
not to the second power, the following message appears.
** INVALID ENTRY
If the designated area (the center of it is the wire centers) cannot be contained within the image, the following
message appears.
** AREA TOO LARGE
4. Enter the edge width (for calculating CT# of water used for offset correction) (default: 4).
EDGE (Pixel) (4)= _
When the entered value is less than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** JUST A MOMENT PLEASE **
If the value is more than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** EDGE TOO LARGE **
2–43 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
2-14 MTF SURVEY (continued)

5. Enter a graph type (default: 3).
SELECT GRAPH TYPE (1:STND/ 2:BONY/ 3:MANUAL)= _
When you select 1 (STND), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 8 LP/cm.
When you select 2 (BONY), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 16 LP/cm.
When you select 3 (MANUAL), enter a maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) (default: 12).
Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm)= _
6. Store the file to graphically view using Support Display.
** STORE FILE **
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>= _
Enter COMMENT = _
** START
** STORE END
2–44 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063

– SUPPORT DISPLY –
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY

Use ‘SUPPORT DISPLAY’ to analyze raw data files or mean files created in Support programs by displaying the imag-
es (these are not back–projected images, but ‘channel–view’ images) or graphs.
Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu to display the following screen:
Illustration 3–1 Support Display Screen
Ch.1 Channel Ch.512
FILE:SUPRAW1
View 1 START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
Information
MIN = 0
MAX =1000
View
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
Image Field 4. ROI
(Channel–View Image) 5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V) Menu
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
View 512 Enter FILE NAME Message
= SUPRAW1
The ‘Image filed’ (see illustration 3–1) comprises a 512 x 512 matrix. The horizontal axis in the image field indicates
channels, and the vertical axis indicates views, as shown. Since a raw data file contains data of beyond Ch.512 and
View 512, the image filed can not show all the data of a raw data file. Use Start Position (2) to change the Channel
and View start positions.
3–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)

A raw data file can be illustrated as below. A raw data file is a two–dimensional type file; a channel has data at each
view. Data is shown as a height of pillars in the illustration. On the other hand, a mean file is one–dimensional; a chan-
nel has one data.
Illustration 3–2 Raw Data File and Mean File
RAW DATA FILE MEAN FILE
Data
Data
Channel View Channel
3–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)

The followings are the menus provided.
1. FILE SELECTION Choose one of four files (three raw data files plus one file that contains up to 16 mean files)
created in Support programs.
2. START POSITION You may assign any channel No. and view No. to the Start Position location.
(upper left corner of the image filed)
3. RANGE You can specify a range within the data range (–1000000 ∼ 1000000), and only the data
failing within this specified range are gray–shaded on the image field.
4. ROI Move the square cursor over a region of interest and the software calculates and displays
its Mean, S.D.(Standard Deviation), Maximum, and Minimum data.
5. MAGNIFY Position the cursor over region of interest and then select a Mag factor from x2 to x10 to
magnify the channel–view image area surrounding the cursor. Or, select a Reduction fac-
tor from x1/2 to x1/10 to reduce the channel–view image; in this function you specify the
channel and view numbers for the upper left corner of the reduced image.
6. PROFILE (H) Position the cursor over a view of interest and software superimposes a graph of data of
each channel over the image. The specifies Minimum and Maximum data values deter-
mine axis graduation.
7. PROFILE (V) Position the cursor over a channel of interest and software superimposes a graph of data
at each view over the image. The specified Minimum And Maximum data values determine
axis graduation.
8. HISTOGRAM Position the square cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a histogram
on the image. You can vary the histogram’s data range by changing the Minimum and Maxi-
mum data values.
9. NUMERICAL Position the cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a numerical display
of the data for the cursor position and area surrounding it (9 locations in all) on the image
area.
10. WHERE Displays the channel No. and view No. indicated by the cursor position.
11. SET CURSOR Enter a channel No. and view No. via the keyboard, and software moves the cursor to the
position on the image screen.
12. ERASE Erases any graphs, lines, or numeric data, produced by programs described above from
the image.
13. GRID Software graduates the channel and view axes, or it also draws grid lines on the image field
according to the graduations.
3–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY

1. Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu.
The ‘Support Display’ screen appears on the image monitor. The right side of the screen displays Support Display
menus. Software automatically selects File Selection (1) when you first enter Support Display.
2. Press [Return] and enter the file name.

Software refuses to accept any other menu selection until you select a file. After you enter the file name, you
can choose any of the following programs:
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No.= _
Note
D Press the [END] key to en the current program and make another selection from the menu.
Press the [END] key at the menu level to end Support Display and return to the Maintenance menu.
D When you make an unacceptable entry, the following message appears:
** INVALID ENTRY
D The following message is displayed when a system error occurs. Software control shifts one level higher,
waiting for a selection from the Display Support menu or the Maintenance menu.
** ERROR XXXXXXXX
(ERROR CODE)
D If the entered parameters exceed the specified range, the following message is displayed, and software
waits for entry of appropriate parameters.
** RANGE ERROR
3–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY (continued)
General Procedure
NOTE: First do the File Selection before using

(1) FILE SELECTION other Support Display function
(2) START POSITION

(Defaults Channel No.:1, View No.:1)
(3) RANGE
(Defaults MIN:0, MAX:1)
MEAN FILE DISPLAY RAW DATA FILE DISPLAY

(6) PROFILE (H) (6) (7) PROFILE (H) (V)
(9) NUMERICAL (4) ROI (5) MAGNIFY
(10) WHERE (8) HISTOGRAM
(11) SET CURSOR (9) NUMERICAL
(12) ERASE (10) WHERE
(13) GRID (11) SET CURSOR
(12) ERASE
(13) GRID
3–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES

The following examples of images (channel–view images) show how raw data looks when the reconstructed images
from these raw data files contain typical artifacts Ring, Shower, and Streak, respectively.
Ring Artifact
One channel consistently gives abnormal data at every view.
Illustration 3–3 Ring Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
3–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES (continued)
Shower Artifact
Illustration 3–4 Shower Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
Streak Artifact
One channel gives abnormal data at one view
Illustration 3–5 Streak Artifact
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1
3–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-4 FILE SELECTION

1. Select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) from the ‘Display Support’ menu.
2. Enter a file name
Note
D For a file name, see the following ‘Files Viewed by Support Display’.
D If you enter a incorrect file name, the following message appears even though file exists:
** INVALID FILE
D If you enter the name of a non–existent file, the following message appears:
** FILE NOTHING
3. Enter MIN and MAX values for RANGE. The following screen appears.
The entered file name appears in the upper right corner of the screen (see illustration 3–6).
If the system selects this menu automatically (immediately after you enter Support Display),
then you must specify the data range; refer to Section 3-6, Range.
Illustration 3–6 File Selection
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0 Displayed Items
MAX =1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW1 Step 2
RANGE
MIN = 0 Step 3
MAX = 1000
3–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-4 FILE SELECTION (continued)
Illustration 3–7 Creation of Mean and Raw Data Files
Maintenance
Mean File Directory Support Raw Data File Directory

Mean File No. File ID No.
Off–Line Scan
Statistics
Offset Average FAN

Mean File
No.
Max, Min,
Original
Mean S.D.
Mean File No. Raw Data File No.
Calculation with Mean File Calculation with Raw Data
Mean File No.

Max, Min,
Original
Mean S.D.
Raw Data File No.
Mean File No.
Maintenance
Support Display
3–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-4 FILE SELECTION (continued)

Support Display can be used for any raw data files listed in RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY (Support program) or any
files stored in OFF LINE SCAN; For this, these raw data files should be stored in STATISTICS. In sTATISTICS, a raw
data file can be shored to any of No. 1 ∼ 3.
Support Display can also be used for any mean files listed in MEAN FILE DIRECTORY, or stored in STATISTICS,
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE, OR CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA.
For example of storing a raw data file;
a. Enter the STATISTICS program.
b. Select ORIGINAL in the FAN menu.
c. Store the raw data file to any of No. 1 ∼ 3
In Support Display, use the following file names for FILE SELECTION.
All the mean files are stored in a file named SUPMEAN, since a mean file only takes storage space for one view.
File Name Raw Data File & Mean File

SUPRAW 1 Raw Data File No.1
SUPMEAN View 1 Mean File 1

View 2 Mean File 2
View 16 Mean File 16
Note
You can shorten the file names as below:
SUPRAW 1 R1
SUPRAW 2 R2
SUPRAW 3 R3
SUPMEAN M
3–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-5 START POSITION

The upper left corner of the image filed is the location for the first channel No. and view No. (start position) of the
displayed image. By default, Channel 1 and View 1 are assigned to the start position, but a different start position
channel and/or view can be entered using this menu.
1. Select 2 (START POSITION).
2. Enter the channel No. and view No. as a start position.

The entered parameters are displayed in the upper right corner of the CRT.
Note
D The following inquiry appears for a raw data file:
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
D The following appears for the SUPMEAN file. Enter 1 ∼ 16 for DATA. (The SUPMEAN file contains 16
mean files in View 1 ∼ 16.)
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
Illustration 3–8 Start Position
Start Position
Channel
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL = 250
VIEW = 10
Displayed Items
RANGE Default:Ch1
MIN = 0
MAX =1000 View1
MAGNIFY =1
View
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 2 Step 1

CHANNEL = 250
VIEW = 10
Step 2
3–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-6 RANGE
Data at each point on the image filed are depicted as shades of gray. The data range of a raw data file is between
–1000000 and 1000000, and a specified range within the data range translates into between –1000 and 3000 gray
levels, which are then displayed on the image field; that is , after you specify the MIN and MAC values, the specified
range is expanded (or reduced) to the –1000 ∼ 3000 range. See illustration 3–9.
Illustration 3–9 Range and Gray Level
–1000000
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
MIN MAX 1000000
RAW DATA
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
GRAY LEVEL
–1000 3000
1. Select 3 (RANGE).
2. Enter MIN and MAX values. The following screen appears.
Note
Software accepts any MIN and MAX values between –1000000 to +1000000, as long as the MIN
value is less than the MAX value. The MIN and MAX values are displayed in the upper right quadrant
of the screen. For example, enter MIN = 0 and MAX = 1000.
Because the default range is relatively narrow and the levels are low, the typical image has offset
views like illustration 3–10, with the rest of the image being (evenly) bright white.
Illustration 3–10 Range
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
Offset CHANNEL = 250
View VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0 Displayed Items
MAX =1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

MIN = 0
MAX = 1000 Step 2
3–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-7 ROI
Use this menu to calculate the statistical information of an area enclosed by a square cursor.
1. Display the square cursor on the screen by pressing the [Crsr] key and [f/j] key. Use the trackball to size and
position the cursor over a region of interest.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding ROI and also do not position the cursor out of range.
otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu 4 (ROI).

The software calculates and displays the statistical data (MEAN, S.D., MAX, AND MIN) in the lower right quad-
rant of the image field.
The cursor’s size and position are displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
Illustration 3–11 ROI
Step 2
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 260
Displayed Items
VIEW = 292
SIZE X = 52
SIZE Y = 42
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
MEAN : 6.034418E + 02 12. ERASE
S.D. : 2.436565E + 01 13. GRID
MAX : 6.635000E + 02 14.
MIN : 5.385000E + 02 15.
Displayed Items
3–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-8 MAGNIFY
Use this menu to magnify the image up to 10 times (x1 to x10).
1. Position the crosshair over a region of interest.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding MAGNIFY and also do not position the cursor out of
range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select 5 (MAGNIFY) to enlarge the area surrounding the + cursor.
Illustration 3–12 Magnify
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =2
Displayed Items
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

MAG <1–10>
</2 – /10> =2 Step 3
3–14 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-8 MAGNIFY (continued)

3. Enter a magnification factor.
The magnification factor is displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
Note
D You can also reduce the image within the range of x1/2 to x1/10 to view the entire image. If you reduce
the image by a 1/8 factor, foe example, enter:
/8 [RTN]
Then specify the channel N0. and view No. which determines the position of the upper left corner of the
reduced image. The channel No. and view No. selectable depend on the reduction factor. If you selected
1/8 for the reduction factor, for example, then the following range is shown:
SAMPLING ORIGIN
CHANNEL <1–8>= _
VIEW <1–8>= _
You can reduce a mean file only in the horizontal direction.
D You can only magnify an image once (You cannot magnify an already magnified image).
4. To return to normal size display, select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) or specify a magnification factor of 1; you
do not need a cursor for either execution.
3–15 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-9 PROFILE (H)

Use this menu to display a graph of data of channels at a specified view. If a channel gave abnormal data during a
scan, the graph will show a significant deviation at this channel. Use this menu to track down ring artifacts.
1. Position the cursor over a view of interest using the trackball (the horizontal position (channel) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE (H) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu item 6 (PROFILE H).
3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot.(Data out of this range is not plotted.
See illustration 3–13)
Software displays the specified MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display Support menu.
Illustration 3–13 Data Range for Profile (H)
ÙÙ
ÙÙ
MAX.
Data
MIN.
ÙÙ
ÙÙ
Channel
3–16 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-9 PROFILE (H) (continued)

4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following way:
a. Press the [End] key to end the Profile program.
b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
5. Change the ‘START POSITION’ to draw a graph for other channels, since the program only graphs 512 channel
at a time
Illustration 3–14 Profile (H)
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
Range
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR Displayed Items
CHANNEL = 353
VIEW = 92
DATA MIN
0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX View 92 is selected.
1.000000e + 04
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION Step 5
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

DATAMIN
= 0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX Step 3,4
= 1000 j
Channel
3–17 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-10 PROFILE (V)

Use this menu to display a graph of data of a specified channel. If a channel gave abnormal data during one or more
views, the graph will show a significant deviation at these views. Use this menu to troubleshoot streak artifacts.
1. Position the cursor over a channel of interest using the trackball (the vertical position (view) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE(V) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu item 7 (PROFILE V).
3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot. (Data out of this range is not plotted.
See illustration 3–15)
Software displays the specifies MIN and MAX values in scientific notation from above the Display support menu.
Illustration 3–15 Data Range for Profile (V)
ÙÙÙ
Data
ÙÙÙ
MIN. MAX.
View
3–18 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-10 PROFILE (V) (continued)

4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following manner.
a. Press the [End] key to en the Profile program.
b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2. and 3.
5. Change the START POSITION (2) to draw a graph for other views, since the program only graphs 512 views
at a time.
Illustration 3–16 Profile (V)
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR Displayed Items
CHANNEL = 433
VIEW = 96
DATA MIN
4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX Channel 433 is
8.000000e + 04 selected.
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION Step 5
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
View

DATAMIN
= 4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX Step 3,4
= 800 j
Range
3–19 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-11 HISTOGRAM
This program draws a histogram on an area enclosed by the box cursor. The histogram shows a frequency distribution
of data within your specified MIN and MAX range.
1. Position the box cursor over an area of interest using the trackball.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding HISTOGRAM and also do not position the cursor out
of range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Change the box size using the [Size] key.
3. Select menu item 8 (HISTOGRAM).
4. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the data range for the histogram.
The histogram is drawn automatically. The size and the center location of the square cursor are displayed in
the upper right quadrant of the screen. (The box cursor remains on the image field.)
Illustration 3–17 Histogram
Step 1,2
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 426 Displayed Items
VIEW = 425
SIZE X = 52
SIZE Y = 42
DATA MIN
4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX
8.000000e + 04
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

MIN
= 4.000000e + 02 Step 4
MAX
= 800 j
Range
3–20 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-12 NUMERICAL
This menu numerically displays data of a location of the cursor and its surrounding locations (nine locations in all) as
illustrated below. This function may be used to determine proper MIN and MAX values for Profile(H) and Profile(V).
Cursor Position
This menu automatically clears the image filed (but leaves the image) before displaying the numerical values, and
highlights the center position.
1. Position the cursor over a location of interest using the trackball.
2. select menu item 9 (NUMERICAL).

The cursor location (Channel No. and View No.) is displayed above the display Support menu.
Illustration 3–18 Numerical
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 315
Displayed Items
VIEW = 126
DISPLAY SUPPORT
6.639999e+02 6.644999e+02 6.710000e+02 1. FILE SELECTION

2. START POSITION
6.605000e+02 6.630000e+02 6.695000e+02 3. RANGE
4. ROI
6.675000e+02 6.590000e+02 6.755000e+02 5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor, the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
3–21 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-13 WHERE
This menu displays the location information (Channel No. and view No.) of the cursor which you position.
1. Position the cursor.
2. Select menu item 10 (WHERE).

The channel No. and view No. of the cursor location are displayed above the Display Support menu.
Illustration 3–19 Where
Step 1
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 314
Displayed Items
VIEW = 142
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
3–22 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-14 SET CURSOR

This menu sets the cursor to the specified location (View No. and Channel No. or Data No.).
1. Enter 11 (SET CURSOR).
2. Enter the channel No. and view No. (or data No.) where you want to display the cursor.
The cursor will be displayed at the location.
Note
For a raw data file, enter the following:
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
For a mean file, enter the following (enter 1∼16 for Data, which corresponds to mean file No.1∼16:
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
Illustration 3–20 Set Cursor
Displayed
Cursor
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

CHANNEL = 350
VIEW = 100 Step 2
3–23 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-15 ERASE
This menu removes graphs, numeric data, or histograms superimposed on the image. Normally, the graphics remain
until a new function clears them, or replaces them with other graphics, or you select ERASE. This menu does not erase
the cursor.
1. select menu item 12 (ERASE).
3–24 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-16 GRID
This menu graduates the channel and view axes and/or draws grid lines according to the graduations on the image
filed.
Note
When displaying the different grid of graduations, first erase the displayed grid using the erase func-
tion (menu item 12), then perform the following. If not erased, a new grid is superimposed on the old
one.
1. Select menu item 13 (GRID).
2. Enter the graduations for CHANNEL and VIEW axes.
Note
For a raw data file, enter both channel and view graduations.
for a mean file, enter only channel graduation.
If the values below are entered, for example, both axes will be graduated at intervals of 50 values.
(If you magnify the image so that multiple pixels depict each channel and view, the program uses the
center pixel.)
CHANNEL = 50
VIEW = 50
3–25 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
3-16 GRID (continued)

3. Select Grid Type or Axis Type; see below.
Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to LINE?, if displaying grid type of graduation.

Select ‘1:No’ in response to LINE?, if displaying axis type of graduation.
Grid Type Axis Type

(Line? 0:Yes) (Line? 1:No)
Note
The graduations start from Channel = 0, View = 0.
Therefor, if the start position is set to Channel = 101, View = 101 and the graduations are set to Chan-
nel = 50, View = 50, for example, the graduations are displayed from Channel = 150, View = 150.
Illustration 3–21 Grid
FILE:SUPRAW1
START
CHANNEL =1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX =3000
MAGNIFY =1
Displayed
DISPLAY SUPPORT
Grid
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

CHANNEL = 50
VIEW = 50 Step 2
LINE? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 Step 3
3–26 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063

– OTHERS –
4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION

This program makes a calibration file from raw data files acquired in off–line or on–line scans. You need the following
raw data: AIR DATA and PHANTOM DATA
Note
D This program changes the existing calibration file. Save these files to a floppy diskette before you start
this program.
D Gather all the raw data used to make the calibration file under the same conditions, on the same system.
D Perform the air calibration (Off–Line) prior to performing the phantom calibration (Off–Line).
D To terminate this program during execution, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Maintenance menu.
4–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION (continued)

1. Select 3 (OFF–LINE CALIBRATION).
2. An example is shown below:
** OFF–LINE CALIBRATION **
–– RAW DATA FILE MENU ––
AIR (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.1;1 ‘CR’
AIR (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.2;1 ‘CR’
PHANTOM (CW) ID No.= 00:1.1.3;1 ‘CR’
PHANTOM (CCW) ID No.= 00:1.1.4;1 ‘CR’
PRESS <END> AFTER ENTRY
–– AIR (CW) ––
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
(FOV 25 cm) (FOV 35 cm) (FOV 42 cm)
TH TH TH
1. 10 mm 5. 10 mm 9. 10 mm
2. 5 mm 6. 5 mm 10. 5 mm
3. 3 mm 7. 3 mm 11. 3 mm
4. 1 mm 8. 1 mm 12. 1 mm
<xx>
<xx–yy>
Select No.<xx,yy,zz> = 1–4 ‘CR’ (Select the CAL files 1, 2, 3, and 4)
Note
If incorrect inputs were made, one of the following messages is displayed:
** INVALID ENTRY
** INVALID RAW DATA (SCOUT)
** RAW DATA NOTHING
** INVALID SCAN ROTATION
The selected CAL files will be changed.
4–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT

‘CT Number Adjustment’ means to change a part of the CAL files with conversion coefficients called β and γ so that
water and air images have CT Numbers 0 and –1000, respectively. The coefficients β and γ are calculated from
scanned images of water and air.
See ‘CT Number Adjustment’, of system of the Functional Check / Adjustment manual, for details.
4–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-3 POST RECON

This program reconstructs an image from the specified raw data on the hard disk.
1. Select 7 (POST RECON).
2. An example is shown below:
** POST RECON **
(DEFAULT=00:00000.02.01;01)
enter Raw data ID No.= 0.1.1 ‘CR’ Enter Raw Data ID No. (Study#.Ser#.Acq#) to be
reconstructed
STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME
0000 03 01 H CW 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 40 1992/07/01 12:34:56
– – SCAN & RECON PARAMETER – –

NO. OF IMAGE = 1
RECON MODE = STND
RECON CENTER–X = 0.0 (mm)
RECON CENTER–Y = 0.0 (mm)
RECON FOV = 25.0 (cm)
MOTION CORRECTION = ON
WINDOW WIDTH = 500
WINDOW LEVEL = 40
ENHANCE = OFF
HF/FF = H
ORIENTATION = SP
ANATOMY = HEAD
SCAN FOV = 25.0 (cm)
THICKNESS = 10.0 (mm)
KV = 120 (kV)
Parameter OK ? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’ Change Scan & Recon Parameters if necessary.
(DEFAULT=00000.01.01;01)
Enter Image ID No.= 0.1.1;2 ‘CR’ Enter image ID No.(Study#.Ser#.Acq#;Image#)
Note
The image ID No. must be a new number. When the image No. already exists, Post Recon can not
proceed.
During Post Reconstruction, ‘Que xx(xx)’ is displayed on the upper corner of the touch panel.
3. Press [END] key to exit.
4. To display the reconstructed image, enter the image ID No. in the Patient List Menu.
Note
When ‘Auto View’ function is set to ON (the indication ‘V’ is displayed on the lower right corner of the
image area), the image will be automatically displayed after Post Recon is executed.
4–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-4 MT RECOVERY
This menu recovers MT images which can not be retrieved due to a tape Parity Error or corrupted directory. This pro-
gram only copies MT images to the disk. To store the images back on a magnetic tape, enter Image File Management
after finishing the MT Recovery.
Select 7 (MT RECOVERY).
*** MT RECOVERY ***

1. PARITY MT RECOVERY
2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY
3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY
1. PARITY MT RECOVERY:
This menu recovers tapes with corrupted MT directories.
a. Select 1 (PARITY MT RECOVERY).

The recovery procedure is started.
Select No.= 1 ‘CR’

RECOVERED IMAGE ID = 00:00009.01.05:01
:
2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY:
Use this menu to recover an incorrectly initialized tape or the images stored after mis–initialization occurred.
In the later case, not all the images can be recovered since Image files in the first part of MT might have been
destroyed.
a. Select 2 (MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY).

The recovery procedure is started.

:
4–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-4 MT RECOVERY (continued)

3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY:
This menu lets you select the images to recover.
a. Select 3 (FILE NO. ENTRY RECOVERY).
b. Input File No. to recover.

File No. 7 <XXX–XXX> 17–18 ‘CR’ File No.: file serial No. from the head of Tape.
TOTAL RECOVERY IMAGE No.= 002
File No. Input Format:
i. File No. XXX to be recovered:
File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX ‘CR’
ii. File No. 0 ∼ XXX to be recovered:
File No.? <XXX–XXX> –XXX ‘CR’
iii. File No. XXX ∼ Last file to be recovered:
File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX– ‘CR’
iv. File No. XXX ∼ YYY to be recovered:
File No.? <XXX–XXX> XXX–YYY ‘CR’
v. File No. 0 ∼ Last file to be recovered:
File No.? <XXX–XXX> – ‘CR’
4–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-5 OD SWEEPER
Use this menu when the system displays the following messages:
ER–440 OD Study inf. Nothing

ER–441 OD Image inf. Nothing
ER–442 OD Study inf. Incorrect
You nay see these messages when someone turned OFF the system during OD operation. In this case, certain OD
information may be corrupted. The OD sweeper function tries to recover the oD from the inadvertent shut–down.
Note
D The OD sweeper function continues processing data, even if system errors occur; the OD SWEEPER tries
to recover as much data as possible.
D It is impossible to manage OD information while OD SWEEPER is operating.
D It is impossible to dismount the OD cartridge while OD SWEEPER is operating.
1. Select 8 (OD SWEEPER).

OD SWEEPER program starts and displays the following messages. OD information might be recovered auto-
matically.
** OD COHERENCE CHECK START **

** STUDY INF DELETE xx:xxxx
** IMAGE INF DELETE xx:xxxx,xx.xx;xx
** FILE DELETE $DMP:0. WRXXXXX.IXXXXX.VR
** STUDY INF REPAIR XX:XXXXX
** OD COHERENCE CHECK END **
4–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY

This menu can be used for restoring the Study Information destroyed by a power–down during storing images onto
the optical disk. (However, not all information can be recovered.)
Hospital Name, Patient ID and Patient Personal Data need to be entered to rebuild the Study Information.
Note
D If the original images still exist on the hard disk, it’s the best way to store the images onto the optical disk
again after running the ‘OD SWEEPER’ menu.
D If the maximum number of images or acquisitions in one Study on the OD is larger than that of the system,
this recovery function can not be performed.
1. Insert the optical disk cartridge to be recovered into the drive.
2. Select 9 (OD STUDY RECOVERY).

First, the program checks the OD to be recovered.
Note
If there happens to be any problem, the following message will be displayed.
D ** OD NOT READY **
OD status is ‘Off–line’ or ‘On mounting’. After checking that it is ‘Mounted’ on the status display, retry.
D ** ILLEGAL OD **
OD is not the system OD or the scratch OD which can be recognized on this system.
D ** PROTECTED OD **
OD is protected. After removing a protect label, retry.
Then the Model No. (lower 2 digits), the Machine No. and the Study No. of the Study to be recovered is displayed.
3. Enter the complete model number (4 digits) by referring to the displayed Model No. list.
** OD STUDY RECOVERY **
Model : **0C
Machine : 1234
Study : 00053
Enter Full Model No. (4Digit) = 010C ‘CR’
Model No. : Model Name
0101 : CT 8600
0102 : CT 8800
.
.
4–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY (continued)

4. It displays the specified Study Information. See below.
Enter the data into the blank column.
Note
Some columns have been recovered automatically by referring to the Image information. They can
also be modified. However, it is not recommended to change the Study Number, Number of Images
and Scan Date.
5. After completing the Study Information, press the [End] key.
Study Information
Station:Study = 00:00053
Number of Images = 017
Enhance = NO C
Scan Date = 1989/10/31
Patient ID = 0425855150
Patient Name = Michael
Patient Birthday = 1962/02/05
Patient Sex = M
Patient Age = 27;08
Patient Weight = 55.0
Model Name = Ct SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIES
Hospital Name = HINO HOSPITAL
OK to Recovery ? <1:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’
6. Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to ‘OK to Recovery ?’/

The OD study recovery is started and it takes several minutes finish.
Note
If there happens to be any problem or interruption, the following message will be displayed.
D ** STUDY INF. FULL **

Study Information Area on OD is full. The study can not be recovered any longer.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY ERROR END **

Any error occurs during the recovery operation.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY CANCELLED **

The CANCEL key is pressed during the recovery operation to cancel.
7. If there is any other Study to be recovered on the same OD, it will return to step 3.
8. When all Studies have been recovered, it will finish with the following message.
**OD STUDY RECOVERY END **
9. Now the OD is ‘Off–line’. Therefore, eject the cartridge once and re–insert it to the drive to read out images from
the recovered OD.
4–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

This function sets the parameter that simulates the temperature of the x–ray tube anode and its case to the maximum
value allowed.
During (off–line) manual exposures, the service person should wait the recommended minimum time between expo-
sures. The CPU keeps a running tally of manual exposures, but does not calculate or impose any delays, nor does
it measure the actual heat generated in the x–ray tube.
Use this TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE function after performing off–line exposures if sufficient cooling time for the next
scans is desired.
1. Select 10 (TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE).
2. Select 0 (Yes) to set the Anode and Case Temperature to the maximum value.
** TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE **
This program will set the anode and Case Temperature Maximum.
OK? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0 ‘CR’
4–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-8 SERVICE MODE

This menu can be used to set/reset a flag for special service purposes. Currently it sets the following:
D ROI value display
– display to on decimal place (flag: OFF)
– display to two decimal places (flag: ON)
1. Select 11 (SERVICE MODE).
2. Enter 1 to set a flag or enter 0 to reset a flag.
** SERVICE MODE **
Service Mode = 0 <0:OFF, 1:ON>
New Data =
4–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

This menu stores the system parameters to a floppy disk or loads them from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The
system had the following parameters:
Station Number Information

Patients Information
Series Description
Scan Parameters
Note
When loading system parameters to the hard disk, be sure that the parameters on the floppy disk
are of the same system, since the system parameters are unique to each system.
Select 12 (SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD).
*** SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD ***

1. Parameter Dump to FD
2. Parameter Load from FD
0. End
Select No.= _
1. Parameter Dump to FD
a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT ‘BOOT’ FD
Press <ENTR> to Continue
If you want to Change the FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOt floppy and inset
a floppy disk for dump.)
2. Parameter Load from FD
a. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT ‘BOOT’ FD
If you want to Change the FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOT floppy and inset
the floppy disk containing the system
parameters.)
4–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063

– CLASS C SOFTWARE –
5-1 INTRODUCTION
In addition to the Maintenance programs which are described in Section 2 through 4, the following class C programs
are provided by class C software disks.
D Class C Service Tools
D Error Message Help
D Heat Soak
Table 5–1 shows the part Nos. of Class C Software disks for Error Message Help (volume name:EH00) and Class
C Service Tools (volume name:SV00) to be used according to product.
Table 5–1 Part No. of Class C Software (EH00 & SV00)
Product Part No. of SV00 Part No. of EH00

CT Sytec/Sytec i series 2131964 P9190RC
5–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS

The class C service tools contain the following:
D Enhanced Alignment
D Automated CT Number Adjustment
D Automated Post Recon
The volume name of the floppy disk containing the above all is ‘SV00’.
5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software

Note
In the Installation or Delete procedure described below, a message “FHS ERROR C2” will be gener-
ated after inputting “IC”, or at the end of procedure. Ignore this message.
Installation (Registration to Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Service Tool software, if the software has been deleted.
Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system
software version–up or reloading procedure.
1. Enter the <Management> menu by pressing the [Mgt] key.
2. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.
3. Enter $$ and the following prompt will be displayed:
>
4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk, and insert the SV00 disk.
5. Enter the following at the > prompt (‘CR’ means [Enter]):
>FN SV00:0.&.SV00INST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
5–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2 CLASS C SERVICE TOOLS (continued)
5-2-1 Installation and Delete of Software (continued)
Delete (from Maintenance Menu)

Perform the following, if necessary, after using the software (this may be required so that only service engineers own-
ing this class C floppy disk can use this software):
>
4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the SV00 disk.
>FN SV00:0.&.SV00DEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
5–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment

ENHANCED ALIGNMENT is a program for performing the adjustment of the following:
D Iso Center Alignment
D Filter Center Alignment
This program allows simpler procedures. The fileld engineer repeats scans and adjustments according to the instruc-
tions displayed on the CRT monitor intil the specifications are met, as illustrated below:
Start
Scan(s)
Within Specifications No Adjustment

?
Yes
END
5–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-2 Enhanced Alignment (continued)
Operation
Select <Enhanced Alignment> from the Maintenance menu.
** ENHANCED ALIGNMENT ***

– – ALIGNMENT MENU – –
1. TUBE ALIGNMENT
2. BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT
Select No.= _
1. TUBE ALIGNMENT:
a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.
b. Select TUBE ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced Alignment menu.
c. Perform air axial scans, according to the instructions displayed.
d. Perform axial scans on a pin, according to the instructions displayed.

In this step a pin (a screw driver, etc.) is to be placed on the scan plane.
e. Adjust the x–ray tube alignment, according to the instructions.
2. BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT:
a. Remove the Bowtie Filter.
b. Select BOWTIE FILTER ALIGNMENT from the Enhanced alignment menu.
c. Perform an air axial scan without bow–tie filter, according to the instructions displayed.
d. Perform an air axial scan with bow–tie filter, according to the instructions displayed.
e. adjust the filter alignment, according to the instructions.
5–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment

As shown below, almost all of CT No. adjustment steps are automatically performed by this program. The scans are
performed only using the 25cm FOV (the minimum one); however, the CT No. adjustment is performed for all the
FOVs.
Water Phantom Centering
Enter <Automated CT Number Adjustment>
Raw and Image Data Space Check, Recon Queue Check
Scans
CT No. Measurement of ROIs

Automatic
Calculations (β and γ)
Cal File Modification
CT No. Verification
1. Attach the phantom holder to the end of the cradle, and set the 25cm water phantom to the phantom holder.
2. Move the cradle to center the phantom on the scan plane, and press the ‘Zero’ button tn the Gantry Control Panel.
3. Select <Automated CT No. Adjustment > from the Maintenance menu.
Data Space Check and Recon Queue Check

At first, the program reserves data spaces for raw data files and image files, and then checks if raw data files
exist in recon queue. If required data spaces can not be reserved, or data exists in recon queue, this program
can not proceed.
5–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-3 Automated CT Number Adjustment (continued)

4. Perform scans.
First, water phantom scans are performed, and then air scans are performed after the cradle is automatically
moved (100mm away from the Gantry).
The following scan parameters are used for scans.
Water Phantom Scans

mA (mA) Scan Time (sec)
Thickness CT Sytec CT Sytec CT Sytec CT Sytec

FOV (cm) KV (kV) Plus S Plus S
(mm)
3000i 2000i 3000i 2000i
4000i 4000i
10 120 100 80
5 120 100 80
25 3 120 160 130 2.7 3.6
2 120 160 130
1 120 160 160
Air Scans
Scan Time (sec)
Thickness CT Sytec CT Sytec

FOV (cm) KV (kV) mA (mA) Plus S
(mm)
3000i 2000i
4000i
10
5
25 3 120 40 2.7 3.6
2
1
CT No. Calculation
Calculated CT Number are displayed one by one on the CRT monitor. The NEW CT Numbers are calculated
using the modifies CAL files, and the OLD CT Numbers are calculated using the old ones.
5. Verify that the NEW CT Numbers are normal (Air: –1000±5, Water: 0±3).
5–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-4 Automated Post Recon

This program automatically tests the operation of post reconstruction a number of times.
First, select a raw data file on which post recon test is performed.
and then, input the image ID which is correctly reconstructed from the raw data file (called reference image).
Recon operation on the selected raw data files is performed and then the resulted image is compared with the refer-
ence image to check if they are identical. IF not identical, the reconstructed image is stored (called error image).
This check repeats the number of times specified (up to 10000) or until 10 (maximum) error images are stored, as
illustrated below.
Start
Input or Raw Data (=A)
Input of Reference Image (=B)
Recon ON ‘A’ (=C)
B=C? No Store of ‘C’
Yes
No All Tests Finished ?
Yes
END
5–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-2-4 Automated Post Recon (continued)

1. Select <Automated Post Recon Test> from the Maintenance menu.
Number of Error Images

At first, the program reserves data space for storing error images. The number of image spaces is usually 10
maximum.
2. Enter the Raw data ID.
Scan and Recon Parameter display

After the raw data ID is properly input, the scan and recon parameters on the raw data are displayed.
3. Change the Scan and Recon Parameters, if required. Normally for this <Automated Post Recon Test>, do not
change the parameters.
4. Enter the reference image ID.
5. Enter the number of tests to be repeated (iteration). The maximum number is 10000.
6. Press the [Enter] key to start the test.
5–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP

When a system error occurs, the error message information only consists of the error name, error number, and other
limited information. The message does not include detailed information on the error (Contents) or items which can
be done for troubleshooting (Action). this ERROR MESSAGE HELP provides these Contents and appropriate Action
on the display screen. This function is available from the service maintenance menu, after installing the ERROR MES-
SAGE HELP disk (Volume name: EH00) to the system.

Note

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Error Message Help, if the software has been deleted.
Usually, the software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system
software version–up or reloading procedure.
>
4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.
>FN EH00:0.&.EHINST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
5–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-3 ERROR MESSAGE HELP (continued)
Delete (from Maintenance Menu)

>
4. Remove the BOOT disk and insert the EH00 disk.
>FN EH00:0.&.EHDEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
5–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-3-2 Operation
1. Select Error Message Help from the Maintenance menu.
The screen should appear as shown below.

The Error Message screen consists of three areas: Window–1, Window–2, and Window–3. In Window–1, a list
of errors are shown which are also displayed on the Status screen.
** ERROR HELP **
(Window–1) ↑
∗∗∗ ER–XXX HH:MM AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA XXXXXXXX LCP=XX TN=XXXX 

↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 
(Error Number) (Time) (Error Name) (System Error) (Logical CPU) (Task) ↓
(Window–2) ↑

Contents= 
↑ 
(Details) 

Action = 
↑ 
(Remedy) ↓
↑
Y/B:Up/Down ERR_NO= SYSTEM ERROR CODE= MSG_NO= 
↑ ↑ 
(Error Number) (Message Number) 
A/":Change Entry Mode Press <END> to End (Window–3) ↓
5–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-3-2 Operation (continued)
Displaying Error Information

Three ways of displaying error information are provided, as described below:
D Displaying error information from the STATUS screen;
Move the cursor to the error row that you want to know about using the Y/B keys in Window–1.
Then, press the Return key.
The error message information (Contents and Action) is displayed in Window–2. The selected error is
highlighted.
When there is not enough room in Window–2 to display the complete information for the error message,
select either Contents or Action using the Shift + Y/B keys, and then the Window–2 area can be scrolled
using the Y/B keys.
D Displaying error information from both Error No. and System Error code;
Move the cursor in Window–3 to ERR_NO= using the A/" keys, and enter the error number (three digits).
Then move the cursor to SYSTEM ERROR CODE= using the A/" keys, and enter the system error code
(eight digits). The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window–2.
D Displaying error information from a Message No.;
Move the cursor in Window–2 to MSG_NO= using the A/" keys. Then, enter the message number.
The Contents and Action for the error message are displayed in Window–2.
Return to Service Maintenance Menu

Return to the service Maintenance menu by pressing the END key.
5–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-4 HEAT SOAK

This program can be used for a heat soak procedure when the x–ray tube is replaced, after performing the <Tube
Calibration> procedure. The Heat Soak function is provided on a floppy disk whose volume name is ‘HTS0’ or ‘HTS1’.

Note

Perform the following loading procedure when you use the Heat Soak, if the software has been deleted. Usually, the
software is intentionally removed after being used, and also the software is removed during a system software ver-
sion–up or reloading procedure.
>
4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.
>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0INST.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
6. Remove the floppy disk.
5–14 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
5-4 HEAT SOAK (continued)
Delete (from Maintenance menu)

>
4. Remove the BOOT floppy disk and insert the correct HTS0 (2172802) floppy disk.
>FN HTS0:0.&.HTS0DEL.CF ‘CR’

>IC ‘CR’
>RT ‘CR’
6. Remove the floppy disk.
5-4-2 Operation
The x–ray tube should be sufficiently cool; Anode/Case Heat should be at 0%.
1. Set the 42cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
2. Move the cradle to a position where the phantom is just over the Detector window, using the positioning lights.
Note
This is to reduce x–ray dose to the detector during the heat soak procedure to protect it.
3. Select <Heat Soak> from the Support menu.
4. Perform scans, according to the instructions displayed.
Note
Do not perform a warm–up or scans for at least ten minutes after completing this Heat Soak proce-
dure.
5–15 SYSTEM
blank 2242063
5–16 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS
6-1 INTRODUCTION
Display of Message
Any unusual occurrence in the system is reported to the OC Message screen. When an error occurs during normal
operation, the console [Status] key LED flashes and a ‘beep’ tone sounds. Press the [Status] key to view the Message
screen. The flashing LED stays steadily lit while the Message screen displays. The most recent error is listed last on
the screen. Press [Status] a second time to return to the normal display screen. (The LED turns OFF until the nest
error starts it flashing –or– you press the [Status] key.)
You can press the [Status] key at any time to view the message screen. The LED stays lit until you press [Status]
a second time to toggle back to the normal display screen.
The system can store 80 lines of error messages.
Format for Message Display
*** ERR–XXX HH:MM Message (32 CHARACTERS) LCP=XX TM=XXX ADD=XXXXXXXX

*1 *2 *3 *5 *6 *7
Data (56 CHARACTERS)
*4
*** MS–XXX HH:MM Message (32 CHARACTERS)
*1 *2 *3
Data (56 CHARACTERS)
*4
*1) Error (Message) No.

*2) The time of Error (Message) generation.
(time:minute)(The actual time the Error (Message) is displayed on the screen.)
*3) Caption Message. Brief explanation of the Error (Message) No.
*4) Data (Error Code, etc.)
*5) Logical CPU No. of CPU which received the Error information.
LCP No. 1 = FMP (File Processor)
3 = DMP (Scan/Display Processor)
*6) Task mane associated with the Error.
*7) Address that generated the Error.
6–1 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-1 INTRODUCTION (continued)
Message No. Groups
000 ∼ 099 . . . . Common Errors (TRAP Error, common function, etc.)

100 ∼ 199 . . . . Scan
200 ∼ 299 . . . . Reconstruction
300 ∼ 399 . . . . Display
400 ∼ 499 . . . . Image File Management
500 ∼ 599 . . . . Communication (Network)
600 ∼ 699 . . . . Multiformat Camera
700 ∼ 799 . . . . (reserved)
800 ∼ 899 . . . . (same as Message 000 ∼ 099)
900 ∼ 999 . . . . Utility
Format for Message Lists

The following format is used to list message and error message lists in Sections
*1 *2
ER–001 System Error
*3
*4
*1) Classification of Error/Message and Message No.

*2) Caption Message
*3) Data (40 characters of upper line and 16 characters of lower line are considered as continuous.)
*4) Description
6–2 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-2 MESSAGE LIST
6-2-1 Message List
MS–000 Abort Button on
Abort Button has been pressed.
MS–001 Start Timeout
Scan Start Time–out (Didn’t press the [Start] button in time)
MS–002 Insert KEY–FD
<Key> floppy diskette is not inserted (Can not proceed to Maintenance program).
MS–003 X–Ray Over Range Detect
X–Ray Data (DAS Data) overrange.
MS–004 FPU Busy
FPU is busy.
MS–005 Tube Warm up End
Tube Warm up Routine has completed.
MS–006 Tube Warm up Canceled
Tube Warm up routine was canceled.
6–3 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-2-1 Message List (continued)
MS–007 Reconstruction’s Queue Full
Number of Queue request for priority Recon is full.
MS–008 Recon Completion

XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
D Reconstruction Completed (Informs when Auto Display mode is not selected).

D XXXXX.XX.XX:XX : Shows Image I.D
MS–009 Calibration End
Calibration Program has completed.
MS–010 Calibration Canceled
Calibration routine was canceled.
MS–011 Warm up Scan Set Timeout
Scan set wait for Warm up Scan Timeou (Didn’t push [Scan Set] in time).
MS–060 Display Busy
The requested program is canceled because Display is in use.
MS–061 On–Line CBF

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
This is the message displayed while performing inhalation or transferring data of On–Line CBF.
6–4 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
MS–070 Image Data Full (Delete & Reset)
Reconstructed Data can not be store in Disk, for Disk is full of Image Data.
Countermeasure: Delete of Archive Image Data, and then pull Rest SW.
MS–071 Image inf. Full in Study

Study No. = XXXXX (Delete & Reset)
Reconstruction is impossible because Image Inf. of study is full.

Countermeasure: Delete unnecessary image data in study XXXXX and then pull Reset SW.
MS–072 Next Scan Preparation Time Out

Just a moment (Max.= 30 sec)
In Dynamic Scan, Scan is not completed within specified delay time.

Countermeasure: Proceed to Scan with no special operation. Push [Abort] button to stop scanning.
MS–073 Pleas delete images in Disk!

Image space in disk is less than 100 images. We recommend you to delete images before scan.
(Vacant Images: xxx)–(Recon Queue: yyy) = xx
The current number of vacant images (available space for new images) is less than 100. This message
appears when the [New Patient] key is pressed, if a number of vacant images (number in recon queue)
is less than 100.
6–5 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
MS–080 Communication Port On Line
When the system is connected to the network using the YMS Link, this message indicates that the sys-
tem can be communicated to others. When the Ethernet Link is used, it indicates only that the power
switch has been turned ON.
MS–081 Communication Port OFF Line
The Communication between the systems has been disconnected.
MS–082 Not Ready to Receive
Images can not be automatically transferred with the communication port On–line.
MS–083 Disconnected in Receiving Data
Communication is disconnected while receiving data.
MS–084 Duplicate Image
When the image is received, the image with the same image ID has been registered.
MS–085 Mismatched Data Patient
When the DC–X contains the optional PDB (Patient Data Base), the image of MDP has been received.
MS–086 Study not Found
The designated Study can not be found.
6–6 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
MS–087 Already Registered Image
The received image has already been registered on the optional PDB of the DC–X.
MS–088 Auto–Trans Target
The image that will be automatically transferred.
MS–089 New Station Registered
A new station has been registered.
6–7 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
MS–090 Auto DEL: Insufficient Send Image
When the images is automatically transferred, the Auto delete function has been worked; however, suffi-
cient space for the image can not have been obtained.
MS–091 Received Image
Images have been received.
MS–092 Refused Receiving Image
Receiving images have been refused.
MS–093 Warning – Unexpected Study Inf.
Incorrect study information.
MS–094 Warning – Unexpected Image Inf.
Incorrect image information.
MS–099 On Dynamic Scan
The current function stops for Dynamic Scan.

The function restarts after Dynamic Scan completes.
6–8 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-2-2 Error Message List
ER–001 System Error

YYXXXXXX
System failure
Error of Directive/System Subroutine etc.
YYXXXXXX:
System Error Code – Section 6-3-1 For Error Message ER–001 (YY=08, 10, 18, 20, 58)
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Section 6-3-2 (YY=80, 88)
DMA Error Code – Section 6-3-3 (YY=28)
DISPLAY Error Code – Section 6-3-5 (YY=30, 38, 40, 90, 98)
(Refer to Section 6-3, Error Code List, about these Error Codes.)
ER–002 Undefined Event Received

XXXXXXXX
There was a failure in the Event Data (Communication message).

XXXXXXXX: The head 4 bytes of Event Data
(This error is a software problem indicator used by design engineering.)
ER–003 Abnormal Termination Detected

XXXXXXXX AAAA
Task was terminated abnormally.

XXXXXXXX
↓
Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER–003 & 004
AAAA: Task name which was aborted.
6–9 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-2-2 Error Message List (continued)
ER–004 Task Termination

BY BBBB XXXXXXXX
TN = AAAA CODE = YY
EDSP detected the termination of Task. This output occurs during normal or abnormal operation be-
cause the software is written that way.
AAAA: Task name which terminated.
BBBB: Task name which terminated Task AAAA.
XXXXXXXX
↓
Refer to Section 6-3-1, For Error message ER–003 & 004
Note
The format of TN CODE is different from other formats.
YY: 01: Normal Termination (In case of normal termination, there is another error message).
02: Abnormal Termination
EDSP: Error Display Task Name.
ER–099 TREND Task Error

XXXXXXXX
This Error occurred when the Error Message was about to register to Disk at TREND Task. (If the ‘Error’
function is called by its normal Error No., the Error could make a permanent loop and bypass the normal
path from EDSP to TREND.)
XXXXXXXX: Return Code (This code is used by design engineering.)
TREND: Trend File of Message
ER–100 Aperture Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Aperture Receive Command Error
2: Aperture 1mm Positioning Error
7: Gantry is not in System Mode
6–10 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–101 Axial Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Axial Scan Request Command Error
2: Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)
3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–up error is detected.)
4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.
5: Gantry is not in System Mode.
6: Gantry Rotation Not Responding
7: Gantry Rotation Over Speed (More than 120% speed)
8: Aperture Positioning Error
9: Table Positioning Error
10: Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error
11: Gantry Not at Rest Position
12: Not used
13: Not used
14: Gantry Position Error (2° internal from the rest position)
15: Gantry Speed Error (Less than 50% speed)
ER–102 Gantry Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Gantry Request Command Error
2: Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)
3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–Up Error is detected.)
4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected
6: Gantry Rotation Not Response
7: Gantry rotation Over Speed
6–11 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–103 Stationary Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Stationary Scan Request Command Error
2: Offset Data Gathering Timeout (1sec)
3: Not used
4: Not used
6: Not used
7: Not used
8: Aperture Positioning Error
9: Table Positioning Error
10: Azimuth Rotation Back Up Timer Error (105%)
11: Gantry Not at Rest Position
ER–104 Manual Gantry Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Not used
2: Gantry Positioning Timeout (20 seconds)
3: Gantry Limit Switch or Cable Check Switch is Actuated.
(Gantry Azimuth Limit is detected or Cable Take–Up Error is detected)
4: Servo Amp. Alarm is detected.
6: Gantry Rotation Not Response
7: Gantry Rotation Over Speed
6–12 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–105 Gantry Elec. Communication Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)
2: Response Time out (No Response within 1 second)
3: Data Sum check Error
Note
Communication data between TGP and Scan Processor.
4: Receive Command Data Error

(Error Codes 5 to B show serial Data communications Errors)
5: Framing Error
6: Over Run Error
7: Parity Error
8: Framing Error and Over Run Error
9: Over Run and Parity Error
10: Framing error and Parity Error
11: Framing, Over Run and Parity Error
ER–106 Tilt Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Out of Tilt Range – Tilt Request from OC is out of Range
ER–107 Scout Scan Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Cradle Positioning Command is out of Range
2: Cradle Unlatch
3: Cradle Slip Error
4: Cradle Stop Error
5: Offset Data Gathering Time–out (2 seconds)
6: Not used
7: Not used
8: Cradle Moving Time–out
9: Gantry Illegal Rotation during scout Scan
10: Scout Scan Back up timer Error (105% of Normal Time)
6–13 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–108 Manual Cradle Error
(No Error code)
ER–109 Cradle Mode Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Cradle Positioning command from OC is out of Range
2: Cradle Unlatch
3: Cradle Slip Error
4: Cradle stop Error
ER–110 Manual Table Error
(No Error code)
ER–111 Table Elec. Communication Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Non Acknowledged Response (3 times)
2: Response Time–out (No response with in 1 second)
3: Data SUM Check Error
4: Receive Command Data Error
5: Framing Error 
6: Over Run Error 
7: Parity Error 
8: Framing error and Over Run Error  Serial data Communication Error
9: Over Run and Parity Error 
10: Framing Error and Parity Error 
11: Framing, Over Run, and Parity Error 
6–14 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–112 XG Communication Error

XX
Error Code X =
1: Hard Error (Parity error, Framing error, or Over Run error)
2: Sum Check Error
4: Response Time–out
8: Non Acknowledge Response (3 times)
ER–113 XG Error
LED STATUS = uvwxyz, %%%KV, %%%MA, HV TIME=%%%%%msec
NV TIME: Time between HV ON and XG FAIL

LED STATUS=uvwxyz: This hexadecimal code shows the LED status (D23 ∼ D39) on the Power Cont
Assy into the X0Ray Generator as shown:
u: 0 ∼ 3 0 0 D23 D24
D23: Over voltage P4
D24: Over voltage N4
v: 0 ∼ F D25 D26 D27 D26
D25: Over Voltage P1
D26: Over Voltage N1
D27: Down Voltage P4
D28: Down Voltage N4
w: 0 ∼ 3 0 0 D29 D30
D29: Over Load P
D30: Over Load N
x: 0 ∼ F D31 D32 D33 D34
D31: Over Heat
D32: Rotor Over Current
D33: Filament Over Current
D34: Power Fail
y: 0
z: 1 ∼ 7 D35 D36 D37 D38
1: HV ON Over time (more than 14.67sec below 100mA)
2: HV ON Over time (more than 5.64sec above 100mA)
3: FIL3 SW does not match soft SW.
4: Can not select 80 or 140 kV for soft SW.
5: RAM over error
6: RAM set error
7: RAM clear error
ER–114 Cradle is not latched
The cradle is unlatched. In other words, the latch switch is in OFF.
6–15 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–115 TGE Response Timeout

XX
Error Code XX =
1: TGE ready wait Time–out
2: TGE new patient wait Time–out
3: TGE H/F first wait Time–out
4: TGE bui (Scan Position) wait Time–out
5: TGE scout/axial wait Time–out
6: TGE scan set wait Time–out
7: TGE scan end wait Time–out
8: TGE scan cradle stop wait Time–out
12: TGE cradle stop wait Time–out
13: TGE warm up wait Time–out
14: TGE off–line wait Time–out
15: TGE cradle stop wait Time–out
16: TGE move gantry wait Time–out
17: TGE off–line scan wait Time–out
ER–116 XG Response Timeout

X
Error Code X =
1: XG Rotor on wait Time–out
2: XG HV on wait Time–out
3: XG HV OFF wait Time–out
4: XG Abort (Rotor OFF) wait Time–out
5: XG Rotor OFF wait Time–out
6: XG Next Scan Set OK wait Time–out
ER–117 XG Fail
X
XG Fail
No Error Code
See LED status of Power Cont Assy.
6–16 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–118 SCNCTL Sequence Error

X
(Scan Control Sequence Error)

If Error Address is :
0XXXXXXX: HV ON/OFF Sequence Error
Scan End status is received before receiving HV ON/OFF status during scan.
4XXXXXXX: Sequence Error of Sequential Scan
8XXXXXXX: Scan Sequence Error generated by Scan Task Program
ER–119 Study No. Error
(No Error Code)

The study No. is not the ASCII numeric data.
The memory might be faulty, or some program might have destroyed the data. Inspect the memory
(Common memory) by the diagnostic program. If the memory is found to be normal, replace the system
software.
ER–120 Cooling Wait Too Long
(No Error Code)

The cooling wait time has elapsed for a longer time than the specified one. (when off–line scans are
performed)
Retry the scan with the less heavy scan technique, or retry the scan after some time (pretty long) has
passed.
ER–121 Next Scan Preparation Timeout
(No Error Code)

Scan task response time–out error.
ER–122 X–Ray Zero Detect
(No Error Code)

Zero data is detected. Check for the detector using support function.
6–17 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–130 Comm. Write Reg. Ans. Net. Wait
(No Error Code)

Received the WRITE REGISTER ANSWER INTERRUPT back, without having requested it.
ER–131 Comm. Receive Buffer Over

X
(No Error Code)

Communication Receive Buffer over flow
ER–132 Comm. Transmit Buffer Over
(No Error Code)

Communication Transmit Buffer over flow
ER–133 Comm. Writ Reg. Ans. Timeout
(No Error Code)

Communication Write Register Answer Time–out Error.
6–18 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–135 PNLCTL Sequence Error

XXXXX XXX XXX
XXXXX XXX XXX

Show Error Code Show Wait Code
(Not used)
Note
PNLCTL: PANEL CONTROL
Error Code =
1: System ready Sequence Error
2: Hew patient OK/NG Sequence Error
3: H/F First OK/NG Sequence Error
4: Scan Position OK/NG Sequence Error
5: Scout/Axial NG Sequence Error
6: Scan OK Sequence Error
7: Scan NG Sequence Error
8: Scan Set OK/NG Sequence Error
9: Start NG Sequence Error
10: Next Scan OK Sequence Error
11: Scan and Sequence Error
12: Scan Sequence Error
13: Scan/Axial F–on req. Sequence Error (F–On req.: Push Button Flashing Request)
16: On–line Request Sequence Error
17: OFF–line Scan reg. Sequence Error
18: Warm up and Sequence Error
19: Scan abort enable OK sequence Error
ER–140 Anode Temperatures Over

XXXX.XX
XXXX.XX: Shows Anode Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.
Tube Anode Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.
Note
To exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).
ER–141 Case Temperature Over

XX.XXX
XX.XXX: Shows Case Temperature (Computer simulated Value) in floating point data.
Tube Case Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.
Note
To exit this error, retry scan sequence (Need time).
6–19 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–151 Scan Timeout

XXXXXX
XXXXXX: Shows DAS DATA DMA Count in Decimal

(Shows Number of Collected data including offset data)
Shortage of DAS DATA
ER–152 Warm up Error

XXXX
XXXX :Shows kind of Error

REF :Count Error
SD :Standard Deviation Error
RATE :Rate Error
HPF :High Frequency Component Error
D REF
9000 ≤ (Mean value of REF ch.1∼22, 23∼44 with offset correction) ≤ 50000
D HPF
Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize) ≤ 0.01 (1%)
D RATE
Previous Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Current Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize) ≤ 0.01 (10%)
D S.D.
S.D (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize)
Mean Value (with Offset Correction and Ref Ch. Normalize) ≤ 0.02 (2%)
ER–153 Initialize Air Data Error

Please check and clean up Gantry aperture.
Raw Data check error when initializing air data.
6–20 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–160 Event Sequence Error
Error in Event Sequence of Up data, OK/NO Good, etc. by Off–Line End Demand or Soft Key.
ER–201 Recon Timeout

PPPPP.SS.AA:II
PPPPP.SS.AA:II Shows Image ID Number Reconstruction Time–out
ER–202 Invalid Parameter

SSSSSSSS
SSSSSSSS: Shows invalid parameter for Reconstruction

This error shows that conversion error occurs during conversation between Operator and CPU.
Suspect hardware.
ER–400 Duplicate Study ID Deleted

STDPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
There were duplicate STUDY IDs in a STUDY POINTER area, therefore the latter study is deleted.
If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued. Otherwise it is probably a
software bug.
ER–401 No study Inf. ID Deleted

The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because there is no STUDY INF. corresponding to the
STUDY POINTER.
software bug.
ER–402 Illegal Study Eye Catcher

The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because EYE CATCHER of STUDY INF. differs.
software bug.
6–21 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–403 Illegal Study ID Deleted

STDPINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
STUDY ID of STUDY INF which is chained from STUDY POINTER was different from the STUDY
POINTER contents, therefor, STUDY POINTER deleted.
software bug.
ER–404 Study in Old Area Deleted

STDINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to new STUDY INF in the old area, the designated
STUDY POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER–405 Old Study Inf. study Deleted

There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to old STUDY INF in the new area, therefore the
designated STUDY POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER–406 Same Area Inf. Study Deleted

STUDY POINTER which had same area was found in STUDY INF., therefor, the designated STUDY
POINTER was deleted.
software bug.
ER–407 No Buffer for Image Inf.

Buffer to read IMGINF is not found.

software bug.
6–22 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–408 Image Inf. Size Over

IMGINF which should be read in Buffer is over the Buffer size.

software bug.
ER–409 Illegal Image Inf Eye Catcher

EYE CATCHER of IMGINF differs, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.
Note
To resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.
ER–410 Illegal Study No Image Deleted

IMGINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGINF SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
STUDY NOs between STUDY INF and IMAGE INF differ, therefor the designated IMGINF was deleted.
ER–411 Duplicate Image Inf Deleted

The Duplicate IMAGE IDs are found in IMGINF, therefore the latter was deleted.
software bug.
ER–412 No Image Data Image Inf Deleted

IMAGE DATA is not found, therefore, IMGINF wad deleted.
software bug.
6–23 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–413 Illegal Study ID Image Deleted

IMGPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGPTR SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
IMGINF was deleted because it is different in STUDY ID of IMAGE POINTER.
Note
To resolve this error, repeat the system reset until this error does not occur.
ER–414 Illegal Study ID image Deleted

IMGINF deleted so that it is different IMAGE ID OF IMAGE POINTER.
software bug.
ER–415 Same Area Image Inf. Deleted

Same AREA is used in IMAGE DATA, therefore, the later IMGINF was deleted.
software bug.
ER–416 Image Data Area Size Over

The required IMAGE DATA area is larger than the available area.
software bug.
ER–417 Duplicate Image Pointer Deleted

IMGINF which is means same area was found, therefore, the latter IMGINF was deleted.
software bug.
6–24 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–418 Image Pointer Area Size Over

The required IMAGE POINTER area is larger than the available area.
If the error occurred due to operation error, the operation can be continued.
ER–419 Same Area Image Inf Deleted

Two IMGINF were found in the same area, therefor, the latter was deleted.
ER–420 Image Inf Area Size Over

The required IMGINF area is larger than the available area.
ER–421 No Image Inf Study Inf Deleted

STDINF which does not have IMGINF wad found, therefor, the designated STDINF was deleted.
software bug.
ER–422 Study Inf area Size Over

The required STDINF are is larger than the available area. Suspect that disk is full.
6–25 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–431 Event Sequence Error

XXXXXXXX YY
The Event was received with illegal timing as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.
XXXXXXXX : The top 4 Bytes of Event.
YY : SEQUENCE
00 Wait status for start from DIMCTL
01 Wait status for FD CHECK
02 Wait status for FD FORMAT
03 Wait status for MT CHECK
04 Wait status for MT FORMAT
05 Wait status for temporary halt response
ER–432 Logical Error
Logic Error occurred as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.
ER–433 Image Already Stored

ID = XX:XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
This image already stored on MT, FD, or OD (Discovered while trying to store this image)
ER–434 Image Already Exist

This image already exists. (Discovered while trying to retrieve this image)
ER–435 Image Not Found

Couldn’t find this image during sore or retrieve to requested Disk or Device.
ER–436 Image in Scan study, No Load

Cannot retrieve this Image Study # because the current scanning Study has the same number.
6–26 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–437 OD Study Incorrect, No Store

Either only Study Inf. or only Image Inf. exists in the Study when storing to OD. So, impossible to store.
Countermeasure: Perform OD sweeper in Maintenance Program.
ER–438 ID Max Over
(No Error Code)

The Image is NOT stored because the ID, listed–up in store, exceeds maximum value of acquisition
numbers of the media.
ER–439 Image Number Max Over
(No Error Code)

This message appears when number of images in one study exceed the capacity of the system or MOD.
ER–440 OD Study Inf Nothing

MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
Image inf. file of the study exists, but the OD cannot find corresponding Image data, so it cannot retrieve
the data.
ER–441 OD Image Inf. Nothing

The Study exists in OD, but the Image Inf. File of the Study does not exist in OD. So, impossible to ac-
cess the Study.
ER–442 OD study Inf. Incorrect

NO. OF IMAGES IN STUDY INF = XXX
NO. OF IMAGES IN IMAGE INF. FILE = XXX
The Number of Images in Study Inf. differs from the actual number of Inf. in Image Inf. File in OD. Ti
is possible to display, but impossible to write.
6–27 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
ER–443 OD Study Inf. Nothing Deleted

Image inf. file for the study exists, but the OD cannot find the corresponding image data: therefore the
designated Image Inf. file was deleted.
ER–500 Inhalator Not Ready
Inhalator Ready Time–out
6-3 ERROR CODE LIST
Format for Error Code

XX: Request Directive Number
X X Y Y Z Z YY: Terget CPU Number
01 or 03:CPU
ZZ: Error Code
00001000: DIRECTIVE ERROR 08XXYYZZ

01011000: DIRECTIVE ERROR 58XXYYZZ
Refer to System Error Code
00010000: IOS ERROR 100000ZZ
00011000: FHS ERROR 180000ZZ
00101000: DMA ERROR 280000ZZ Refer to DMA Error Code
10000000: INFCTL ERROR 800000ZZ
10001000: IMGCTL ERROR 880000ZZ
6–28 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code
For Error Message ER–001
SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OC)
D 08XX00ZZ
08010003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK

08010005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL
08010006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
08010008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
0801000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK
0801000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
08020003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK
08020007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
0802000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK
08040005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL
08040006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
08040007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
0804000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
08060003 SOURCE TASK NOT FOUND
08060007 DESTINATION TASK NOT FOUND
08060009 USER TO SYSTEM TASK NOT ALLOWED
0806000B ADDRESSES DIFFERENT EVEN/ODD BOUNDARY
08090003 TARGET TASK NOT FOUND
080B0006 DUPLICATE TASK NAME
080B0008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
080D0003 TASK DOES NOT EXIST
080D0023 TASK DOES NOT EXIST
080D000A TASK NOT DORMANT
08100003 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST
08100006 TARGET TASK ALREADY IN TERMINATION
08100009 USER TASK CAN NOT TERMINATE SYSTEM TASK OR SELF
0817000A TASK IS TERMINATING
08190006 TARGET TASK ALREADY STOPPED
08190009 USER TASK CAN NOT STOP SYSTEM TASK
083A0001 UNDEFINED XI/O
083A0002 UNIMPLEMENTED I/O
083A0003 TASK NOT–EXISTED
083A0008 UNDEFINED I/O
083A0009 MULTIPLE ASSIGN
083AFF81 CLOSE ERROR
083AFF82 ALLOCATE ERROR
6–29 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-1 System Error Code and Abort Code (continued)
SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OS)
D 100000ZZ
1000000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE

10000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT
10000021 CFMS CPU FAIL
10000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL
10000082 INVALID FUNCTION
10000083 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
10000084 INVALID DATA BUFFER
10000085 INVALID RANDOM RECORD
10000086 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
10000087 PROTECT CODE ERROR
100000C1 BUFFER OVERFLOW
100000C2 END OF FILE
100000C3 END OF VOLUME
100000C4 INVALID OR EMPTY FAB
100000C5 INVALID TRANSFER FOR DEVICE
100000C6 BREAK CONDITION
100000C7 INTERNAL IO ERROR
100000C8 FAB/DATA BLOCK CONFLICT
100000C9 RECORD DOES NOT EXIST
100000CA RECORD ALREADY EXISTS
100000CB RECORD OVERFLOW/TOO MANY RECORDS IN DATA BLOCK
100000CC KEY ERROR, FAB KEY CONFLICT
100000CD DISK SPACE FULL
100000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
100000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR
100000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
100000E1 DEVICE NOT READY
100000E2 DEVICE BUSY
100000E3 DATA CRC ERROR
100000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
100000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
100000E6 TIMEOUT
100000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
100000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR
100000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR
100000EA DATA OVERRUN
100000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
100000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
100000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
100000EE SEEK ERROR
100000EF BAD SECTOR
6–30 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
D 100000ZZ (continued)
100000F1 CHANNEL BUSY

100000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR
100000F3 CHANNEL UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
100000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR
100000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
100000F6 DMA BUS ERROR
100000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR
100000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
For MT
10000088 INVALID BLOCK LENGTH

10000091 TAPE MISMATCH (800/1600BPI)
10000092 FILE NOT FOUND (MT)
10000093 REJECTED BY MT
10000094 DATA SHORT 0 (MT BLOCK READ)
10000095 LOST DATA 0
10000096 ERROR CORRECTED (MT WRITE)
10000097 I/O ERROR (MT DIRECTIVE)
10000098 I/O ERROR (MT PACKET)
10000099 INCONSISTENCY OF WRITING TYPE (MT)
1000009A FILE MARK ERROR (MT)
100000C6 INTERNAL ERROR
100000C9 BLOCK DOESN’T EXIST
100000CD INSUFFICIENT TAPE SPACE
For OD
100000A0 INVALID COMMAND

100000A1 PBN NOT FOUND
100000A2 UNWRITTEN (READ)
100000A3 DELETED (READ)
100000A4 OVER WRITE (WRITE)
100000A5 ALTERNATE TRACK FULL (WRITE)
100000A7 DON’T SEARCH UNWRITTEN
100000A8 BUS ERROR
100000A9 BUS TIME OUT
100000AA DVC TIME OUT
100000AB GPIB COMMUNICATION ERROR
100000AC DISK PERMANENT ERROR (READ)
100000AD DISK PERMANENT ERROR (WRITE)
100000AE DRIVE ERROR
100000AF ODC ERROR
6–31 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
D 180000ZZ
18000002 INVALID COMMAND

18000003 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
18000004 INVALID OR NONEXISTENT VOLUME
18000005 DUPLICATE FILE NAME
18000006 FILE DESCRIPTOR ERROR
18000007 PROTECT CODE ERROR
18000008 RECORD LENGTH ERROR
18000009 SHARED SEGMENT ERROR
1800000A INSUFFICIENT DIRECTORY SPACE
1800000B ACCESS PERMISSION ERROR
1800000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE
1800000D ASSIGNMENT ERROR
1800000E INVALID DEVICE DEVICE TYPE
1800000F BUFFER OVERFLOW
18000010 INVALID TASK NAME
18000011 INVALID BUFFER ADDRESS
18000012 INVALID FILE TYPE
18000013 INTERNAL FHS ERROR
18000014 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
18000015 DATA BLOCK LENGTH ERROR
18000016 SIZE ERROR
18000017 NONEXISTENT FILE NAME
18000019 KEY LENGTH ERROR
1800001A FAB LENGTH ERROR
1800001B DEFAULT VOLUME NOT DEFINED
1800001C INVALID STATE FOR COMMAND
1800001D USER NOT OWNER OR ADMINISTRATOR
18000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT
18000021 CFMS CPU FAIL
18000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL
180000CD DISK SPACE FULL
180000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
180000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR
180000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
6–32 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
D 180000ZZ (continued)
180000E1 DEVICE NOT READY

180000E2 DEVICE BUSY
180000E3 DATA CRC ERROR
180000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
180000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
180000E6 TIMEOUT
180000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
180000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR
180000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR
180000EA DATA OVERRUN
180000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
180000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
180000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
180000EE SEEK ERROR
180000EF BAD SECTOR
180000F1 CHANNEL BUSY
180000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR
180000F3 UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
180000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR
180000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
180000F6 DMA BUS ERROR
180000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR
180000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
D 200000ZZ
20000001 UNDEFINED DIRECTIVE

20000012 OUT OF SEGMENT AREA
20000013 FILE IS NOT A LOAD FILE
D 58XXYYZZ
5814YY30 TARGET CPU HALT

5814YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
5823YY30 TARGET CPU HALT
5823YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
(FILE PROCESSOR)
YY: LOGICAL CPU NO. 01 or 03: CPW
6–33 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Note
Normally though an error codes are displayed in eight digits, the error codes occurred y the Ethernet
network are often in four digits. Note that the dummy code of ‘0000’ or ‘FFFF’ might be added to the
original error code blow (80XX):
D 80XX
8006 TASK STOP INSTRUCTION FROM TERMINAL

8009 UNEXPECTED BREAK
8010 BUS ERROR
8011 ADDRESS ERROR
8012 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION
8013 ZERO DIVIDE
8014 CHK INSTRUCTION
8015 TRAPV INSTRUCTION
8016 PRIVILEGE VIOLATION
8017 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (1010)
8040 COMPULSORY STOP
D 00XXYYZZ
XX
01 ACK TIMEOVER
02 RESPONSE TIMEOVER
03 ACK AND RESPONSE TIMEOVER
04 RESPONSE SEQUENCE ERROR
08 RESET REQUEST
10 BUS/ADDRESS ERROR IN COMMAND LIST
20 RETRY OVER
80 DEVICE ERROR
YYZZ
0802 F–PORT TIMEOUT

1002 BUS ERROR
2001 NO LUTB
2002 MAPPING ERROR
4001 COMMAND IN RUN
4002 V–BUS TIMEOUT
4021 COMMAND IN RUN
4041 COMMAND IN RUN
6–34 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
For Error Message ER–003, ER–004
TERMINATION CODE (GENERATED BY EXEC)
D XXXX
8010 BUS ERROR

8011 ADDRESS ERROR
8012 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION
8013 ZERO DIVIDE
8014 CHK INSTRUCTION
8015 TRAP INSTRUCTION
8016 PRIVILEGE INSTRUCTION
6–35 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code

D Code (ZZ)
A1 Error of GETADC or GETADA
A2 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (DISK)
A3 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT.
A4 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is 0.
A5 The number of IMAGE DATA FILE BLOCK is lass that the number in SYSTEM WORK.
A6 IMAGE INFORMATION BUFFER is smaller than all IMAGE INFORMATION SIZE in

1 STUDY.
A7 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (OD)
Table 6–1 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Allocate
Code (ZZ) Description

00 The designated Study was already registered.
01 The designated Study does not exist.
02 The designated Image was already registered.
03 Image No. Deciding Error.
04 Study Area full./ OD Study INF file full.
05 Image INF Block full./OD Image INF file full.
06 The Area in Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.
07 Image File full./OD Image INF file full during allocation.
08 There is no space in Image INF BUFFER.
09 The size of Image INF is too big.
0A Study INF Initial Value Error.
0B Image INF Initial Value Error.
0C The designated Image doesn’t exist.
0D Number Full (SER, ACQ IMG)
0E N/A
0F N/A
10 OD Off line
11 OD Protected
12 Impossible to Allocate for Illegal Form of STUDY, IMAGE INF.
6–36 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code (continued)
Table 6–2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Delete

20 The designated Study does not exist.
21 There is no specified Study. It is not deleted.
22 There was not enough in the specified Study.
23 There is no specified Image. Ti is not deleted.
24 There was not enough in specified Image.
26 The reading size of Image INF is too big.
27 N/A
28 Impossible to delete for all of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
29 Impossible to delete for some of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
2A Impossible to delete for the study of the appointed Image is protected from delete
2B N/A
2C N/A
2D N/A
2E N/A
2F N/A
30 OD Off line
31 OD Protected
32 Impossible to delete for Illegal From of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.
6–37 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–3 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – GET/PUT

40 There is no designated Study.
41 There is no pertinent Image.
43 The reading size of Image INF is too big.
44 Access is out of Image Area.
45 N/A
46 N/A
47 N/A
48 N/A
49 N/A
4A N/A
4B N/A
4C N/A
4D N/A
4E N/A
4F N/A
50 OD Off line
51 OD Protected
52 Impossible to read/write for Illegal Form of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.
6–38 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–4 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Parameter Error

C0 Function No. Error
C1 Station No. Error (It is impossible to change to Mode/Machine No.)
C2 Study No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C3 Series No. error (except for the numeric data)
C4 ACQ No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C5 IMG No. error (except for the numeric data)
C6 There is no STD in STD INF which is ready.
C7 There is no IMG in IMG INF which is ready.
C8 The number of Image INF Block is except for 1 or 2.
C9 The number of Image INF Block is less than 0.
CA The number of List is less than 0.
CB Completion Type Error.
CC Flag Error (Mode etc.)
CD It is not Old in spite of the other machine.
CE Search Mode is 0 and Mode/Machine No. is 1.
CF Image size is 0.
6–39 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–5 INFCTL/IMGCTL – Logic Error of INFCTL/IMGCTL

E0 Event Code Error
E1 Sub Code Error
E2 This was already registered during Study INF Allocate.
E3 This was already registered during Allocate in Image INF File.
E4 N/A
E5 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study Pointer Delete.
E6 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study INF Delete.
E7 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Image INF Delete.
E8 SCBITOPR Error during Study INF Delete.
E9 SCBITOPR Error during Delete in Image INF File.
EA SCBITOPR Error during Image PRT/File Delete.
EB The area in Image INF File full.
EC This was already registered during Image INF Allocate.
ED Scan or Load is different from the position in File during Image INF Allocate.
EE N/A
EF N/A
6–40 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-3 Display Error Code
980000XX :User/Prime Display Function

30YY00XX :PLNCTL
38YY00XX :KBDRV
40YY00XX :DPDRV
1000000XX :Connected with WTTY
jjYY00XX :Basic Graphic
6–41 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-3 Display Error Code (continued)
Table 6–6 Display Error Code
XX Description Task Name

50 Directive No. Error
51 ODD parameter Address
52
53 Invalid Request
54
55
56 Invalid Parameter (W/L Control)
57 Invalid Parameter (Frame Setting)
58 Invalid Parameter (Frame Data)
59 Invalid Parameter (W/L)
5A Invalid Parameter (Identify)
5B Invalid Parameter (γ)
5C Invalid Parameter (Image Display)
5D Invalid Parameter (Image Data Read)
5E Invalid Parameter (Paging)
5F Invalid Parameter (Interrupted Image) DPDRV
60 Invalid Parameter (Interrupted FPU) (40YY00XX)
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68 Time Out (Image display)
69 Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
6A Time Out (W/L Processing)
6B Time Out (Interrupted Image)
6C Time Out (Interrupted FPU)
6D
6E
6F Graphic Sequence Error
(Continued)
6–42 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–6 Display Error Code (continued)

71 ODD Parameter Address
72 Device No. Error
73
74
75
76 Invalid Parameter (Erase Processing)
77 Invalid Parameter (Graphic DMA)
78 Invalid Parameter (Screen Save)
79 Invalid Parameter (Overlay Display)
7A Invalid Parameter (Graphic Cursor)
7B Invalid Parameter (Report Cursor)
7C Invalid Parameter (LED/Buzzer)
7D
7E
7F PLNCTL
80 Time Out (Erase Processing) (30YY00XX)
81 Time Out (Graphic DMA)
82 Time Out (Screen Save–overlay)
83 Time Out (Screen Save–image)
84 Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E ACRTC Command Error
8F Graphic Sequence Error
(Continued)
6–43 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063

91 Invalid Parameter Block Address
92 Invalid Parameter
93 Invalid Request
94 Can not requested Command
95 Invalid No. of characters
96
97
KBDRY
98 Key Board not allocated
(38YY00XX)
99 Channel Busy
9A Response Time Out
9B
9C Hardware Error
9D Hardware Error
9E Hardware Error
9F Hardware Error
A0
A1 Invalid Parameter
A2 Not Defined Area
A3 Duplicate Define
A4 Value Not Defined
A5 Invalid Area Position
A6 Invalid Area Size
A7 User/Prime
A8 Display Func
A9 (980000XX)
AA DCB Graphic Flag Double Assigned
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
(Continued)
6–44 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063

B0
B1
B2 User/Prime
B3 Display Func
B4 (980000XX)
B5
B6
B7 Read Event Flag error
B8 Event Status Error
B9 Event Busy Error
BA Not Enable Mag. Character Error
WTTY
BB Cancel Flag Error
(100000XX)
BC Over Split Over Error
BD Not Split Device Error
BE Over line error
BF Invalid Parameter Error
C0 Write FIFO Empty Time Out Error
C1 Write FIFO Ready Time Out Error
C2 Read FIFO Ready Time Out error
C3 Read FIFO empty Time Out Error
C4
C5 Command End Time Out Error
C6 BASIC
Graphic
C7 (30YY00XX)
C8 Command Error (38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
C9 (98YY00XX)
CA
CB
CC
CD ACRTC Not Ready
CE
CF
(Continued)
6–45 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063

D0
D1 Configuration Error
D2 Operation Timing Error
D3
D4 Address Error
D5
D6
D7
D8 Bus Error
D9
DA
DB
DC Count Error
DD
DE BASIC
Graphic
DF (30YY00XX)
E0 Abort (38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
E1 Software Abort (98YY00XX)
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8 DMAC Ready Time Out Error
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
(Continued)
6–46 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063

F0 Time Out Error
F1 Can not Display During Horizontal Blanking
F2 Can not Refresh DRAM During Horizontal Blanking
F3
F4
F5
F6 BASIC
Graphic
F7 (30YY00XX)
F8 (38YY00XX)
(40YY00XX)
F9 (98YY00XX)
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF Invalid Parameter Error
Table 6–7 Display Error Code – 28YY00XX (DMADRV)

00
01 Directive No. remains undecided
02 Invalid Parameter Block Address
03 Invalid Direction code
04 Invalid Memory Address
05 Invalid Data Size DMADRV
06 Invalid CPU Number
07
08
09
0A
(Continued)
6–47 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–7 Display Error Code – 28YY00XX (DMADRV) (continued)

80 Channel Busy
81 Configuration Error
82 Operation Timing Error
83 Remains undecided
84 Address Error
85 Address Error
86 Address Error
87 Address Error
88 Bus Error
89 Bus Error
8A Bus Error
8B Bus Error
8C Count Error
8D Count Error
DMADRV
8E Count Error
8F Count Error
90 External Compulsory Stop
91 Software Compulsory Stop
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
A0 Time Out
6–48 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–8 Display Error Code – 48YY00XX (Image Data Unpack)

02 Odd parameter Address
03 Unpack Task is Busy
04 Unpack Task is not Busy
10 Odd Information Block Address
11 Invalid parameter
20 Not Dame Task
(Different Task from Request one confirmed for completion of Unpack)
Table 6–9 Display Error Code – 5000XXXX (Image Inf. Display)
XXXX Description Task Name

00F0 Image Type is not Supported
00F1 Display Task is Busy
00F2 Invalid file Name
80YY Task abort (Refer to System Error Code)
Table 6–10 Display Error Code – A8000XXX (Special Error)
XXX Description Task Name

001 Internal logic error (IFM Display Error)
002 GETS error (IFM Display Error)
003 Internal logic error (IFM Display Error)
201 OD error (OD Error)
202 Bit map oversize (OD Error)
300 Not initialized (OD Error)
301 Different volume name (OD Error)
302 Not initialized (OD Error)
303 Different family name (OD Error)
010 No station space (INFCTL Error)
100 System sequence error (INFCTL Error)
6–49 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code
Table 6–11 FPJOIN Error Code
Error Code Description

00000000 Normal Completion
08UUYYZZ Trap 1 Error
90000001 PINT (FPU ↔ CPU Interrupt)
90000002 Reset
90000003 Invalid Parameter
90000004 Time Out
90000005 Busy (FPU Running)
90000006 Busy (FPU Initializing)
90000007 Illegal (Error Occurred in FPU)
90000008
90000009 Reset Error (can not Reset)
9000000A
9000000B Interrupt Over (Interrupt Buffer Overflow)
9000000C The IPU is not idling.
9000000D
9000000E
9000000F
900000FF (Not–supported function called)
6–50 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-5 DMA Error Code
Table 6–12 DMA Error Code
Error Code Description

00000000 Normal Completion
28XX0001 Directive No. remains undecided

28XX0002 Invalid Parameter Block Address
28XX0003 Invalid direction Code
28XX0004 Invalid memory address
28XX0005 Invalid Data Size
28XX0006 Invalid CPU number
28XX0080 Channel Busy

28XX0081 Configuration Error
28XX0082 Operation Timing Error
28XX0083 Reserved
28XX0084 Address Error
28XX0088 Bus Error
28XX0089 Bus Error
28XX008A Bus Error
28XX008B Bus Error
28XX008C Count Error
28XX008D Count Error
28XX008E Count Error
28XX008F Count Error
28XX0090 External Compulsory Stop

28XX0091 Software Compulsory Stop
28XX00A0 Time Out

Note: XX is Directive number.
6–51 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-6 RAWCTL Error Code
00000000 No Error
A0000001 I.D No. Error
A0000002 Not Valid
A0000003 Transfer Byte Error
A0000004 Sub Code Error
A0000005 Size Error
A0000006 Can not Reserve
6–52 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code

The following error codes are displayed for systems with the ETC board.
Table 6–13 Ethernet OS Error Code
Code Description
0001 Task ID error.
0002 Can not keep TCB (Task control block).
0003 Can not keep memory.
0004 Memory block does not exist.
0005 Mail box is in use.
0006 Can not send designated message.
0007 Buffer full.
0008 Abnormal waiting for character entry.
0009 Abnormal system call.
000A Time out.
000B Message is not received.
000C Queue ID error.
000D Queue full.
000E Non–existent designated memory partition.
000F Fatal initialized error occurred.
0010 Character is not entered.
0011 Abnormal configuration parameter OS.
0012 Abnormal parameter when creating or expanding memory partition.
0020 Component vector is not assigned.
0021 Undecided component assigned.
0022 Undecided operation code assigned.
0030 Control block does not exist.
0031 Event flag or semaphore ID error.
0032 Task is waiting for event flag or semaphore.
0033 Event flag or semaphore deleted.
0034 Event flag or semaphore doubled.
6–53 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
6-3-7 Ethernet Error Code (continued)
Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code
Code Description
0A01 Abnormal owner.
0A03 Designated process does not exist.
0A06 Designated device or address does not exist.
0A0D Abnormal access mode.
0A11 File is already existed.
0A16 Abnormal parameter.
0A18 Too many files opened.
0A20 Connection destroyed.
0A23 Designated operation blocked.
0A24 Designated operation is now run.
0A25 Designated operation is already run.
0A26 Socket operation is run.
0A27 Destination address does not exist.
0A28 Too long message.
0A29 Abnormal protocol for socket.
0A2A Invalid designated protocol.
0A2B Designated protocol is not supported.
0A2D Designated operation is not supported in socket.
0A2F Designated address family is not supported.
0A30 Designated address is busy.
0A31 Can not assign designated address.
0A32 Network is down.
0A33 Can not connect network due to abnormal AUI cable and ETC.
0A35 Software disconnects network.
0A36 Connection is reset.
0A37 No buffer space.
0A38 Designated socket is busy.
0A39 Designated socket is not connected.
0A3C Connection time out.
0A3D Connection rejected.
0A40 Satellite down.
0A41 No satellite connection.
(Continued)
6–54 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)
Code Description
0A50 Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A51 Insufficient local memory space.
0A52 Can not keep ARP table.
0A53 designated satellite is not registered.
0A54 Abnormal internet address.
0A55 Abnormal network setting for internet address.
0A56 Insufficient global memory space.
0A57 Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A58 Faulty Lock
0A59 No CDT
0A5A PANIC (in–in_control)
0A5B PANIC (icmp–icmp_error)
0A5C PANIC (icmp–length)
0A5D PANIC (ip–init)
0A5E PANIC (raw–user req)
0A5F PANIC (route–free)
0A60 PANIC (tcp–pull oob)
0A61 PANIC (tcp–output)
0A62 PANIC (tcp–output REXMT)
0A63 PANIC (tcp–user req)
0A64 PANIC (udp–user req)
0A65 PANIC (m_get)
0A66 PANIC (m_free)
0A67 PANIC (m_copy)
0A68 PANIC (m_copy)
0A69 PANIC (m_copy)
0A6A PANIC (sofree)
0A6B PANIC (soclose)
0A6C PANIC (soaccept)
0A6D PANIC (sorecv)
0A6E PANIC (sorecv)
0A6F PANIC (sorecv)
(Continued)
6–55 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
Table 6–14 Ethernet Communication Control Routine Error Code (continued)
Code Description
0A70 PANIC (sorecv)
0A71 PANIC (soisconnected)
0A72 PANIC (sbappendrights)
0A73 PANIC (sbflush)
0A74 PANIC (sbflush)
0A75 PANIC (sbdrop)
0A76 PANIC (accept)
0A77 PANIC (arp–no free entry)
6–56 SYSTEM
REV 1 2242063
The following table lists the error codes generated by the Ethernet board driver.
Format:XXYZ
XX :Task ID
Y :Operation Code
Z :Error Code
XX Task ID Y Description Z Description
F0 System Bus Driver 0 Memory space 1 Table Full
1 Packet transmission 2 Busy
2 Packet reception 3 Abnormal Pattern
4 CPU board 4 Over range
5 Packet switching itself 6 Request Doubled
F1 Ethernet Driver 0 Initialization 7 Abnormal designated Address
1 Transmission 8 Not Found
2 Reception C Retry counts over specifications
F2 Modem Driver 0 Initialization D failed
1 Transmission E Not Supported
2 Reception F Not Ready
F9 I/F Manager on 1 Initialization of Ethernet BD
CPU BD
2 Queue transmission for task of
Ethernet BD
3 Mail transmission for task of Ehter-
net BD
4 Temporary stop for task of Ehernet
BD
5 Operation resumption for task of
Ethernet BD
6 Task deletion of Ethernet BD
7 Task load start of Ethernet BD
8 Next operation mode setting of
Ethernet BD
9 Memory access of Ethernet BD
FA I/F Manager on 7 Task load start
Ethernet BD
9 Memory access
FB Program Loader Remains Undecided
6–57 SYSTEM
blank 2242063
6–58 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 7 – IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION
7-1 DESCRIPTION
MTR Survey Program

Image spatial resolution can be measured by scanning a GE Performance Phantom and analyzing the acquired image
with the MTF Survey program included in Support within the Maintenance menu.
The MTF Survey program calculates MTF data by the two–dimensional Fourier Transform of the point spread function
using pixel data around the wire.
Since the program stores the result to a mean file, analyze the result using Support display, and evaluate the system
spatial resolution performance.
The following section describes the procedure for this spatial resolution evaluation using MTF Survey.
7–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2 PROCEDURE
Special Tools/Supplies
D GE Performance Phantom (2102580)
7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom

1. Set the GE Performance Phantom approximately at the scan center.
2. Touch the [New Patient] button, and then select [Neck].
3. Select ‘OFF’ for Motion Correction
4. Adjust the position of the phantom so that the wire point within the phantom is positioned at the scan center:
a. Perform an axial scan with the following parameters:

3.6 or 4.5 sec, 120kV, 160mA (others: default)
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the wire point and the scan center in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the wire point, and then, press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the wire point.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X Axis, and then, press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location
and display the distance between the wire point and the X axis (A). See illustration 7–1.
iv. Perform the above to measure the distance between the wire point and the Y axis (B).
Illustration 7–1 Positioning Wire Point to Scan Center
B Wire Point
X
A
Scan Center
7–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2 PROCEDURE (continued)
7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)

d. Shift the phantom so that the wire point is positioned at the scan center, according to the distances measured
at the above step.
Use the up–sown adjuster and right–left adjuster o the phantom holder (one turn: 1mm movement).
e. Repeat steps a through d, until the wire point is positioned at the scan center within ± 0.5mm.
If the image shows a white band over the wire point, this indicates that the wire point is not yet positioned
correctly at the scan center. See illustration 7–2.
Illustration 7–2 White Band Over Wire Point
White Band
7–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2-1 Scanning the GE Performance Phantom (continued)

5. Write down the wire point position in pixel:
a. Press the [Crsr] key to display the crosshair cursor on the image.
b. Using the trackball, move the cursor onto the wire point. See illustration 7–3.
c. Press the [Image Meas] key, and then select ‘REPORT CURSOR’.
d. Verify that X and Y locations of the cursor are indicated in ‘cm’ on the upper right of the screen.
e. Press the [End] key once.
f. Press the [Image Trtmt] key, and then select ‘SET DISPLAY’.
g. Select ‘PIXEL INDICATE’.

The highlights ‘PIXEL INDICATE’, and then the X and Y locations are indicated in pixel.
h. Write down the wire point position in pixel and image number:
Wire Point Position x (in pixel)

y (in pixel)
Image Number : . . ;
6. Proceed to Section 7-2-2.
Illustration 7–3 Positioning the Cursor onto Wire Point
Wire Point
7–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2-2 MTF Survey Program

1. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive. (This step is not required for systems installed in Japan.)
2. Touch the [Maint] key, and enter $$ , as follows:

1. CALIBRATION
.
.
Select No.= $$ ‘CR’
3. Select Support from the Maintenance menu.
4. Select MTF Survey from the Support menu.
5. For the following prompts, enter as described:
a. Enter the image ID recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
b. Enter X location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
c. Enter Y location of the wire in pixel, recorded at step 5 in Section 7-2-1.
d. ‘AREA SIZE <8 / 16 / 32 / 64 / 128 (pixel)> (32)’
D Press the [Enter] key to accept the default value.
e. ‘EDGE (pixel) (4)’

It will take approximately 30 seconds until the next prompt appears.
f. ‘SELECT GRAPH TYPE <1:STND / 2:BONE / 3:MANUAL>’
D Select ‘MANUAL’
g. ‘Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm) (12)’
h. ‘Enter MEAN FILE No. <1–16>’
D Enter ‘1’ as the mean file No.

This mean file contains the result of analysis performed by this MTF Survey program.
6. Press the [End] key twice.
7. Proceed to Section 7-2-3.
7–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve)

1. Select Support display from the Maintenance menu.
2. Select File Selection.
a. Enter M from FILE NAME.
b. Enter 0 from MIN.
c. Enter 1000 for MAX.
3. Select Set Cursor.
a. Enter 1 for CHANNEL.
b. Enter 1 for DATA. (the calculated mean file No.)
4. Select Profile (H).
a. Enter 0 for DATA MIN.
b. Enter 1.2 for DATA MAX.
A graph is drawn, as is shown in illustration 7–4.
Illustration 7–4 MTF Curve
1.000
0.800
EXAMPLE
0.600
0.400
0.200
2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000
7–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
7-2-3 Displaying the Result (MTF Curve) (continued)

5. From the graph, read ‘lp/cm’ values for 50% and 10% of the MTF curve.
Write down the values in the table below.
Illustration 7–5 Reading MTF Curve
1.000
0.800
EXAMPLE
0.600
50%
0.400
0.200
10%
2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000
MTF 50% 10%

Measured Value lp/cm lp/cm
7–7 SYSTEM
blank 2242063
7–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2242063
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – POWER UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 OVERVIEW (INCLUDE: READING HEXA–DECIMAL LED STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-1 Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3-1 Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3-2 Test Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-4 ERROR CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
SECTION 2 – OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-2 External Display Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-1-3 Extension Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2 OFF–LINE TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-2-2 Off–Line Test Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3 CPW OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-3-1 Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-3-2 Test Items (CPW Off–Line Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-4 IPU OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-4-2 Test Item (IPU Off–Line Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-4-3 Test Items Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-5 DISP OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-5-2 Test Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-5-3 Test Items (DISP Off–Line Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-6 MISC OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-6-2 Test Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2-7 SBPU OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2-7-2 Test Items (SBPU Off–Line Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0 2242063
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 3 – ETC BOARD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-3 Running the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-1-4 LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-1-5 Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-2-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-2-2 Required hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-2-3 Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-2-4 External display Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-3 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 CPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 IPU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 DISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-4 MISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-5 ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-6 ODC2 (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-7 MTC (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-8 ETC (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
APPENDIX A – CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 1 – POWER UP SEQUENCE
1-1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (INCLUDE: READING HEXA–DECIMAL LED STATUS)

The Power–ON test program is used for OC self–diagnostics during the Power up sequence, and is resident in the
ROM on the CPW assy.
This test program has two categories: Power On Test 1 (P–ON1) and Power On Test 2 (P–ON2).
The P–ON Test 2 includes more detailed tests than P–ON Test 1, and takes longer to run.
P–ON Test 1 is normally selected during routine customer operation. P–ON Test 2 can be used by the field engineer
to perform a more detailed analysis in the event of an error occurring on the system.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in 2 or 3 ways depending on the test concerned as follows:
1. CPW LEDs (all tests)
2. CRT display monitor (all tests, except CPW Phase 1, and DISP Phase 1 tests)
3. Terminal connected to CPW RS232C output (all tests)
See Section 1-2 for more details.
If at any point during the P–ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the failed test number/code
remains on the CPW LEDs. With the exception of CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 1 tests, the test name/description
will also be displayed on the CRT monitor along with a brief error description.
Note
There normally no need to connect a CPW RS232C terminal, since no additional information other
than that on the LEDs and monitor can be obtained during P–ON Tests. Connecting a terminal is only
necessary for the execution of the off line tests.
The total processing time is as follows:
Table 1–1 Test Processing Time
Test Processing Time Time from Test Start, to System

Ready
P–ON 1 Test 4:00 minutes. 4:16 minutes.
P–ON 2 Test 13:05 minutes. 13:21 minutes.
1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0 2242063
1-1 OVERVIEW (continued)
Reading Hexa–decimal Numbers from LEDs

The hexa–decimal number in each rectangle herein represents the LED status displayed on the CPW board. Read
the LEDs from top to bottom (MSB to LSB). Decode the top four LEDs to create the most significant hex digit (the
leftmost digit) and the bottom four to create the least significant hex digit (the rightmost digit). All hexa–decimal codes
are displayed with the letter ‘H’.
More detailed status and information is displayed on the CRT from CPW Phase 2 test, so it is normally not necessary
to decode the LEDs status.
Example:
8
7
6
5 bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (LSB)
4 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 (90H)
3
2
1
‘F’ means ‘Illuminated’ and equals ‘1’: ‘f’ equals ‘0’. LEDs are set at the start of each routine. If any error occurs during
self–testing, the LEDs display the corresponding error code.

REV 0 2242063
1-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST
1-2-1 Switch Setting

Set the DIP switch on the CPW Assy (location 8A1) as required according to the following:
ON :1
OFF :0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Normally
OFF
Communication Speed
1 2 3 Test Mode Selection 7 8
(Unit: Baud)
1 X X Test Skip 0 0 9600
0 1 X OFF–Line Test 0 1 1200
0 0 1 Power On Test 2 1 0 2400
0 0 0 Power On Test 1 1 1 19200
X: Don’t Care. The following parameters are set by default with
each speed setting and cannot be cancelled;–
1. Character length = 8 bits
2. Stop Bit = 1 bit
3. Party = None
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the DIP switch setting
during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change the parameters, first set the DIP
SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.
Note
This test program does not write any data to the HD, but it does require a properly formatted HD.
i.e.: The tests will run with a normal operational HD, but not with an unformatted replacement HD.

REV 0 2242063
1-2-2 Hardware Configuration

The following illustration shows the minimum hardware configuration required to run the test program.
Illustration 1–1 Hardware Configuration
System Bus
CPW Assy
HDD #0 This test program supports one or two
HDD; they are selected by the SW setting
on the CPW. See the illustration below for
the proper setting.
HDD #0
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IO Bus
The current revision of the CPW board
IPU2 Assy does not support dual HDD use.
DISP Assy
CRT
ON ON :1
OFF :0
1 2 3 4
TPC Assy
Normally all OFF.
Always OFF.
Number of HD
TPC Assy 0 One HD
1 Two HDs (Not available)

REV 0 2242063
1-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS
1-3-1 Test Sequence

The following illustration is a flow chart showing the sequence of the Power On Test program and where the results
are displayed.
Illustration 1–2 Test Sequence Flowchart
System Power On Test CPW LED Display Monitor (CPW RS232C)

Program Activity Activity Activity
Start
(Power On or
Reset)
CPW Test Test Number
(Phase 1) $11–$18
Status Test Number and
Blank
OK Pass/Fail Status
DISP Test Test Number

(Phase 1) $30–$38
Status Test Number and
Blank
OK Pass/Fail Status
CPW Test Test Group

(Phase 2) $1F
Status Test Number and Test Number and
OK Pass/Fail Status Pass/Fail Status
IPU2 Test Test Number/Group

$40–$4E
DISP Test Test Number/Group

(Phase 2) $39–$3F
MISC Test Test Number/Group

$2F–$24
End
$80 Sloader
System System Preparation
$8F Then
Preparation
$90 Terminated

REV 0 2242063
1-3-2 Test Items

Tables to list the associated parameters of each individual P ON Test. These tables all have the same format and
include the following information;
Test number/code and name
Test mode under which the test is selected (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or both)
Hardware to be checked – most likely failed assy, in the event of an error occurring.
Test sequence
The CPW LEDs display a unique test number/code for CPW Phase 1 and DISP Phase 2 tests. Following these tests,
some codes are duplicated. The CRT (on the Operator Console) displays the test program status from CPW TEST
(Phase 2 ) onwards.
A terminal connected to the CPW will display the test program status fro all tests.
Note
shows what boards or devices which are thoroughly tested.
shows what boards or devices which are partly testes.
If an error occurs during P ON TEST, the test and CPW LEDs stop to run. In addition, for the test
after CPW test (Phase 2), the error message can be displayed on the CRT monitor.

REV 0 2242063
1-3-2 Test Items (continued)
Table 1–2 CPW Test (Phase 1)
LED Test Mode Hardware to be Checked

Test Item
Status 1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
SRAM W/R/V Test (1) $11

CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM) $12
CPW (2) ROM SUM Check Test $13
CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test $14 *
CPW (4) Control/Status Reg. W/R/V Test $15 *
CPW (5) DMAC Reg. W/R/V Test $16 *
CPW (6) Bus Error Test (IPU MD) $17
CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/R/V Test (1) $18
* : There is a discrepancy between the contents of P–ON Test1 and P–ON Test2.
Table 1–3 DISP Test (Phase 1)

Test Item
DISP (1) ACRTC Initialize Test $30

DISP (2) ACRTC Pattern RAM W/R/V Test $31 *
DISP (3) OVL Plane Control Reg. W Test $32
DISP (4) DISP Control Reg. W/R/V Test $33
DISP (5) Int. Mask Reg. W/R/V Test $34
DISP (6) ACRTC Interrupt Test $35
DISP (7) VSYNC Interrupt Test $36
DISP (8) OVL Plane Memory W/R/V Test $37 *
DISP (9) ACRTC DMA Test $38

REV 0 2242063
Table 1–4 CPW Test (Phase 2)

Test Item
CPW (7) FDC Reg. W/R Test $1F

CPW (8) SCSIC Reg. W/R Test $1F
CPW (9) SRAM W/R/V Test (2) $1F *
CPW (10) CPW–DRAm W/R/V Test (2) $1F *
CPW (11) Calendar Read Test $1F
CPW (12) DMA (CPW–DRAM) Test $1F *
CPW (13) DMA (IPU MD) Test $1F *
CPW (14) HD Read Test $1F * HD
Table 1–5 IPU Test
Test
Hardware to be Checked
Test Item LED Mode
Stat s
Status
1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
IPU (1) Reset Reg. R/W Test $40

IPU (2) Abort Reg. R/W Test $40
IPU (3) Ext. MD Reg. from CPU Read Test $40
IPU (4) Interrupt Req. Reg.1 to IPU R/W Test $40
IPU (7) Interrupt Ack. Reg. to IPU R/W Test $40
IPU (8) Extended MD Check $41 Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (9) Command Area Access Test $42
IPU (10) CPU MD Access Test $43 *
IPU (11) CPU Extended ME Access Test $43 * Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (12) DMA Test $44
IPU (13) Vector Area Fetch Test $45

REV 0 2242063
Table 1–5 IPU Test (continued)
Test
Hardware to be Checked
Test Item LED Mode
Stat s
Status
1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
IPU (14) Interrupt Status Reg. Read Test $46

IPU (15) Interrupt Level Reg. Read Test $46
IPU (16) Interrupt Mask Reg. R/W Test $46
IPU (17) Interrupt ACK Reg. R/W Test $46
IPU (18) Interrupt Req. Reg. Write Test $46
IPU (19) Extended MD Reg. Read Test $46
IPU (20) Status LED Reg. R/W Test $46
IPU (21) Switch Reg. Read Test $46
IPU (22) Driver Area Access Test $47
IPU (23) Interrupt Request Test 1 $49
IPU (24) Interrupt Request Test 2 $49
IPU (25) Simultaneously Access Test $4A
IPU (26–1) Driver Test 1 $4B
IPU (27) Bus Error Test $4B
IPU (28) IPU MD Access Test $4C *
IPU (29) IPU Extended MD Access Test 1 $4C * Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (30) IPU Extended MD Access Test 2 $4C * Ext MD Slot 1,2
IPU (31) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 0) $4D
IPU (32) CPU/IPU Access Test (Bank 1) $4D
IPU (33) Memory Module Test $4E Ext MD Slot 1,2

REV 0 2242063
Table 1–6 DISP Test (Phase 2)

Test Item
DISP (10) DISP IMG Reg. W/R/V Test $39

DISP (11) Buf Count Reg. W/R/V Test $3A *
DISP (12) Buf Reg. W/R/V Test $3B
DISP (13) Buf Size Reg. W/R/V Test $3C *
DISP (14) VSYNC Interrupt Test $3D
DISP (15) IFB W/R/V Test $3E *
DISP (16) DAS Buf W/R/V Test $3F *

REV 0 2242063
Table 1–7 MISC Test
Test Mode Hardware to be Checked

LED
Test Item Status 1 2 CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
MISC (1) WR Reg. Intro W Test $2F

MISC (2) Inter Status R Test $2F
MISC (3) WR CC Inter Mask W Test $2F
MISC (4) Test Mode W Test $2F
MISC (5) INT Mask CTL W Test $2F
MISC (6) OC I/F Dual Port RAM R Test $2E
MISC (7) XG Status R Test $2D
MISC (8) Scan key SW Data Reg. R Test $2C
MISC (9) Scan PNL display Enable W Test $2C
MISC (10) Scan Panel Lamp On Test $2C
MISC (11) Auto Voice CTL W Test $2B
MISC (12) Voice Time Data R Test $2B
MISC (13) SM Buzz CRL W Test $2B
MISC (14) Scan Key Status A,B R Test $2C
MISC (15) GTX P–On Status R Test $2A
MISC (16) KB Key Code–Reg./Status R Test $29
MISC (17) KB Lamp Reg. W/R/V Test $29
MISC (18) KB Beep Reg. W Test $29
MISC (19) Track Ball CNT R Test $28
MISC (20) TPC I/F Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $27 *
MISC (21) MFC Status R Test $26
MISC (22) MFC Write Reg. W, Read Reg. R Test $26
MISC (23) Scan INT Mask CTL W Test $25
MISC (24) XG Control W Test $24

REV 0 2242063
1-4 ERROR CODE

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the CPW fails during the power–up sequence due to the Operating
system failure.
Table 1–8 Error Code
LED Status Condition Remedy

D0 Bus error due to accessing nonexistent Suspect memory or reload software.
memory address or executing inade-
quate instruction.
D1 Address error due to word reference to Suspect memory or reload software.
odd address.
D2 ∼ D8 Exception due to incorrect instruction or Suspect memory or reload software.
corrupted memory.
E0 Abnormal termination due to abort of OS Error information is stored in crash
related task. save area.
E1 Abnormal operation system. Error information is stored in crash
save area.

REV 0 2242063
1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA

When abnormal termination is caused by any failure (Bus Error, Address Error, or OS task crash), error information
is stored into an area of Memory called the ‘Crash Save Area’. Each processor has a Crash Save Area.
The Crash Save Area contains the following information:
Program Counter 
Status Register  at crash
Other registers 
LED status 
For details, see illustration 1–3.
The Crash Save Area on each processor is saved onto the hard disk at power–on. You can also save this information
onto floppy diskette as shown in illustration 1–4. Use the following procedure to transfer Crash Save Area information
to floppy diskette.
Under crash condition:
1. Label a crash save floppy diskette and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
Note
The first time you use this diskette, initialize it for a crash save according to Appendix A, How to Make
Crash Save disk.
2. Pull the system reset switch with the diskette in place to automatically transfer a copy of the crash save area
of each processor onto the diskette. The system rest switch is located beneath OC keyboard console extension.
3. Use the following procedure to read the contents of the diskette.
a. Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.
b. Set the BOOT select switch on the CPW board to the following positions:
ON
1 2 3 4
c. Pull the system reset switch.
d. Make sure the ‘>’ prompt appears on the CRT monitor, and then remove the BOOT diskette and inset the
crash cave diskette.
e. The diskette contents should resemble illustration 1–4.

REV 0 2242063
1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)
Illustration 1–3 Crash Save Area
Crash Save Area Address A00(H) – AFF(H)

Relative
Address
0 Program Counter (4 Byte)
(spare)
6 Status Register (2 Byte)
8 Register D0 (4 Byte per Each)
:
:
D7
A0
:
:
A7
48 User Stack Pointer (4 Byte)
4C Bus Error Vector (4 Byte)
50 Function (2 Byte)
52 Access Address (4 Byte) Access Address when Bus error or address error
has occurs.
occurs
56 Command Register (2 Byte)
Applicable
A licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.
58 Status Register (2 Byte)
5A Program Counter (4 Byte) Program address causing Bus error / address
error.
error
Applicable
A licable for LED status D0(H) or D1(H) ONLY.
64 LED Status (1 Byte) (Spare)
70 Date (4 Byte)
File Processor ONLY
ONLY.
74 Time (4 Byte)
(Spare)
80 Error Status (1 Byte) DMAC CER (1 Byte)
82 DMA Transfer Address (4 Byte)
86 Reserved HDC Command Code
88 HD Physical Sector Number (4 Byte)
90 HDC Command Parameter (16 Byte)
A0 HDC Result Parameter (16 Byte)
FE (Spare)

REV 0 2242063
1-5 CRASH SAVE AREA (continued)
Illustration 1–4 Crash Save onto Floppy Disk
Crash System Reset Save
CPW Memory
0 micro:textC8
A00(H) Crash Save Area micro:textC

Floppy Disk
B00(H) Sector 0
B00(H)
> FN FDMP:0.&.DUMP.SY ‘CR’

FDMP:0000 .DUMP .SY (00,00)
> FD 0 10 ‘CR’
000000 00 00 54 3C 00 33 20 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 09 ..T<....8.......
000010 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 40 00 00 00 06 00 02 09 90 ......@.........
000020 00 01 26 CA 00 01 28 CA 00 01 31 16 00 00 0C 00 ..&...<....]....
000030 00 00 53 E2 00 01 26 CA 00 FF 31 00 00 02 09 C0 ..S...&...1.....
000040 00 01 38 00 00 00 0B EE 00 01 29 8E 00 00 24 52 ..8.......>...&R
000050 10 35 00 FF 03 81 10 28 20 00 00 00 67 E4 00 00 .5......<...G...
000060 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
000070 00 00 0A F1 02 94 10 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
CPW Crash
000080 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
Save Area
000090 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000A0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000B0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000C0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000D0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000E0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000F0 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
>

blank 2242063

REV 0 2242063
SECTION 2 – OFF–LINE TEST
2-1 GENERAL
2-1-1 Overview
The off–line tests for diagnosing each of the following electronic boards and some components (Hard disk drive, Audio
Assy, etc.) installed within the Operator Console are provided on each separate floppy diskettes.
D CPW
D MISC (and TPC)
D DISP
D IPU
D SBPU
The off–line tests for MISC include communication tests between CPW and the processor equipped within the Gantry.
The off–line tests perform more extensive diagnostics than the on–line tests described in the previous section.
The off–line tests report which device or operation is the cause of a system or information system failure.
The off–line tests except for the CPW board are provided on floppy diskettes. The off–line test for the CPW board
is provided on the ROM on the CPW board. The off–line tests are interactive ones, requiring an external display termi-
nal.
The test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the CPW status LEDs as
well as on the display. The status LEDs turn off when all the off–line tests have been finished without an error.
Illustration 2–1 shows the general flow of the off–line tests except the ETC off–line test.

REV 0 2242063
2-1-1 Overview (continued)
Illustration 2–1 General Flow of Off–Line Test
System Off–Line Test
Power–On
Primary Test for CPW
Failed
Error Code Displayed on LEDs
Passed
Main Menu for Off–Line Test
CPW Test
ROM
MISC Test
FD
DISP Test
FD
IPU Test
FD
SBPU Test
FD
Note: To exit the off–line test, set the Dip SW

on the CPW board and reset the system.

REV 0 2242063
2-1-2 External Display Terminal
Terminal Settings
Use a display terminal which accepts ASCII characters. The settings for the terminal are described below:
D X Parameter (XON and XOFF Control): not effective
D Character Length: 8 bits
D Parity: none
D Stop Bit Length: 1 bit
D Rate (Communication Speed): 9600, 1200, 2400, or 19200 (bits/s) This set should be the same as the
set value by the Test Dip Switch on the CPW Board. see illustration 2–2.
D Carriage Return Code: CR+LF ($0D $0A)
D Carriage Return: automatic at a line end
D Local Echo: none (The off–line test program echos back).
Key Function
The following Table shows the keys used for the test programs.
Table 2–1 Key Function
Key Function
0∼9, A∼F Selection of test items; Values to be entered
– Range designator (used for address designation)
RET Enter; Execution of a step
Q Abort
SPACE Pause (toggle operation)
others ignored

REV 0 2242063
2-1-3 Extension Boards

Either one of two kinds of extension boards is used depending on the circuit board, as shown below:
D EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) is only used for: IPU, DISP, SBPU.
D EXTDR Assy (P9500YY) is only used for: other boards listed above (CPW, MISC, other).
CAUTION
Board Destruction!
Do not use the EXTDR2 Assy (P9191YY) for boards other than IPU, DISP, SBPU, or for other
slots except for IPU, DISP, SBPU; otherwise, the board installed to the EXTDR2 Assy, and
some other boards together will be destructed.

REV 0 2242063
2-2 OFF–LINE TEST OPERATION
2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test

Set the Test Switch on the CPW board according to illustration below, and switch ON or reset the system. Then the
following is performed in the described order:
Illustration 2–2 Off–Line Test Dip Switch Setting
ON :1
OFF :0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Normally
OFF
Communication Speed
1 2 3 Test Mode Selection 7 8
(Unit: Baud)
1 X X Test Skip 0 0 9600
0 1 X OFF–Line Test 0 1 1200
0 0 1 Power On Test 2 1 0 2400
0 0 0 Power On Test 1 1 1 19200
X: Don’t Care. The following parameters are set by default with
each speed setting and cannot be cancelled;–
1. Character length = 8 bits
2. Stop Bit = 1 bit
3. Party = None
D Execution of the Power On CPW SRAM W/R/V Test (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $11)
D Creation of Interrupt Vector Table and Setting of Stack Pointer
D Initialization of devices
D Calling the test (Power On Test1, Power On Test2, or Off–Line Test) according to the Test Switch setting.
Processing for Error Interrupt

If an error interrupt listed below occurs, the YMON (YMS Monitor) program is called.
D Bust error Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)
D Address Error Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)
D Undefined Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $10)

REV 0 2242063
2-2-1 Pre–operation for Off–Line Test (continued)
Processing for Abort

When the Abort switch is pressed, which is always accepted by the system, the YMON is called.
Primary Test for CPW Board

Prior to displaying the off–line test menu, the primary tests are performed on the CPW Board as listed below. If an
error occurs during the tests, the off–line tests can not be called. These are the same as the tests performed in the
Power On Test. Refer to Tables 1–2 and 1–4.
D CPW (1) Bus Error Test (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $12)
D CPW (2) ROM Sum Check Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $13)
D CPW (3) Interrupt Handler W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $14)
D CPW (4) Control/Status Register W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $15)
D CPW (5) DMAC Register W/R/V Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $16)
D CPW (7) FDC Register W/R Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $17)
D CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/R/V Test (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $18)
D CPW (12) DMA (CPW–DRAM) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (LED: $19)

REV 0 2242063
2-2-2 Off–Line Test Main Menu

After the CPW primary tests are finished without an error, the following menu is displayed:
– – – – – OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU – – – – –

1) CPW BOARD TEST
2) OTHER BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)
SELECT MENU > _
The off–line tests except for the CPW Board are provided on floppy diskettes. When ‘2’ is selected in the above menu,
the following is displayed:
– – – – – OFF LINE TEST MAIN MENU – – – – –
1) CPW BOARD TEST

2) OTHER BOARD TEST (PROGRAM LOADING FROM FD)
SELECT MENU > 2
MOUNT PROGRAM FD (requesting the floppy diskette to be mounted in the drive)
HIT RET KEY !
(Set the floppy diskette and press the ‘Return’ key)
TEST–PROGRAM LOADING
OFF–LINE TEST Loading File = xxxxxxxx
LOADING COMPLETE !
xxxx OFF–LINE TEST Rev.xx
(displays test menus)
.
.
.

REV 0 2242063
2-3 CPW OFF–LINE TEST
2-3-1 Required Hardware

D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D SBB Assy
D HDD
D FDD
D Display Terminal
2-3-2 Test Items (CPW Off–Line Test)
Table 2–2 CPW Off–Line Test Items
Test LED Hardware to be Checked

Test Item
No. Status CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
1 Loop Test (Power On Test2) $1F HD

2 CPW–DRAM Write/Read/Verify Test $1F
3 SRAM Write/Read/Verify Test $1F
4 HD Test $1F
1) HD Write/Read/Verify Test $1F HD
2) HD Self–diagnostics $1F HD
3) HD Formatting $1F HD
5 FD Test $1F
1) FD Write/Read/Verify Test $1F FD
2) FD Formatting $1F FD
6 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test1 (DRAM → DRAM) $1F
2) Bus Error Test $1F
7 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test2 (DRAM → IPU MD) $1F
8 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test3 (DRAM → HD) $1F HD
9 1) DMA Write/Read/Verify Test4 (DRAM → FD) $1F FD
: Hardware to be checked. : Hardware concerned in the check.

REV 0 2242063
2-4 IPU OFF–LINE TEST

D IPU Assy
D CPW Assy (This board must be operate normally.)
D FDD
D Display Terminal
D FD (IPU Off–Line Test Software : P9190ZB)
2-4-2 Test Item (IPU Off–Line Test)
Table 2–3 IPU Off–Line Test Items
Test Hardware to be Checked

Test Item
No. CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
1 Extended MD Register Read Test

2 Sequential Test Extended MD Slot 1,2
3 System Bus Access Test Extended MD Slot 1,2
4 Program Fetch Test
5 i860 Driver Test
6 Basic Function Test Extended MD Slot 1,2
7 Basic Subroutine Test
8 Memory Module Test Extended MD Slot 1,2

REV 0 2242063
2-4-3 Test Items Description

D Extended MD Register Read Test
Tests the read operation of the Extended MD Register, which contain the information of the equipped MD
capacity and address. The correct result of this test must be confirmed prior to performing the following
tests.
D Sequential Test
Performs the System Bus Access Test (3) to Basic Subroutine Test (7) sequentially. The following tests
are not performed in this test.
Extended MD Register Read Test (1)
A part of Basic Function Test (6)
Memory Module Test (8)
D System Bus Access Test

Tests registers and memory which can be accessed via the System bus.
D Program Fetch Test

Tests mainly fetch of the programs residing in the MD vector area.
D i860 Driver Test

Tests the driver programs required for execution of the i860 application software
D Basic Function Test

Tests the i860 basic functions, such as memory read/write using the driver programs, and simultaneous
memory access, which are required for execution of the i860 complex application software.
D Basic Subroutine Test

Tests more dynamical operations, using the basic subroutines which are used in the application programs.
D Memory Module Test

Tests each SIMM constituting the IPU MD.

REV 0 2242063
2-5 DISP OFF–LINE TEST

D DISP Assy
D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D 14” CRT
D FDD
D Display Terminal
D FD (DISP Off–Line Test Software : P9190ZC)
2-5-2 Test Menu Screen

After the initialization of the DISP Off–line Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.
– – – – – – DISPLAY OFF LINE TEST – – – – – –

1) *SELECT TEST ITEM (SEQUENTIAL TEST)
2) SELECT TEST MODE (SINGLE)
3) RUN
4) END
ENTER NO. _
If you select 1), the terminal displays the list of all the tests.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the menu item is currently selected.

REV 0 2242063
2-5-3 Test Items (DISP Off–Line Test)
Table 2–4 DISP Off–Line Test Items
Test Hardware to be Checked

Test Item
No. CPW IPU DISP MISC TPC Others
1 Sequential Test
2 ACTC Pattern RAM Write/Read/Verify Test
3 OVL Plane Control Register Write Test
4 DISP Control Register Write/Read/Verify Test
5 Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test
6 VSYNC Interrupt Test
7 OVL Plane Memory Write/Read/Verify Test
8 ACRTC DMA Test
9 OVL Plane Control Test
10 OVL Scroll Test
11 OVL Split Test
12 OVL Test Pattern
13 DISP Image Register Write/Read\Verify Test
14 Buffer Count Register Write/Read/Verify Test
15 Buffer Size Register Write/Read/Verify Test
16 VSYNC interrupt Test
17 IFB Write/Read/Verify Test
18 IFB Write/Read/Verify Test
19 DAS Buffer Write/Read/Verify Test
20 IFB Display Test
21 OVL Test Pattern & IFB Display Test

REV 0 2242063
2-6 MISC OFF–LINE TEST

Note
Always rest the system after finishing the MISC OFF–LINE TEST, otherwise, a system error will oc-
cur if this or other off–line test is run.

D MISC Assy
D CPW Assy
D TPC Assy
D TPC SUB Assy
D FDD
D TOUCH PNL
D LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
D AUDIO Assy
D PNL Assy
D PNL IF Assy
D KB SUB Assy
D Trackball / Keyboard
D SBB Assy
D Display Terminal
D FD (MSC OFF–LINE TEST Software : P9190ZD)
2-6-2 Test Menu Screen

After the initialization of the MISC Off–line Test is completed, the terminal displays the following menu.
– – – – – – MISC OFF LINE TEST – – – – – –

1) TEST SELECT & RUN
2) PANEL INTERFACE TEST
3) TPC INTERFACE TEST
4) KB/TB INTERFACE TEST
5) OC INTERFACE TEST
6) MFC CTL TEST
7) RS232C TEST
0) END
ENTER NO. _

REV 0 2242063
2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line Test)
Table 2–5 MISC Off–Line Test Items

Test Item
1 Panel Interface Test

1) Lamp Test $2B PNL Assy
2) Key Switch Test $2C PNL I/F Assy
3) Touch Panel Buzzer Test $2B

2 Audio Interface Test
1) Play Test $2B Audio Assy
2) Play Back Test $2B
3) Record Test $2B
4) Time Data Test $2B
5) Bank Memory W/R/V Test $2B
6) Load Test $2B
7) Dump Test $2B
8) Auto Voice Load/Dump/Verify Test $2B
3 TPC Interface Test
1) Touch Panel Display Test $27 TPC, TPC Sub Assy
2) Touch Panel Sense Test $27 LCD Touch Panel
3) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $27 TPC Assy

4 Keyboard/Trackball Interface Test
1) Key Switch Test $29 KB Sub Assy
2) Trackball Test $28 Keyboard
T kb ll
Trackball
3) Buzzer Test $29

REV 0 2242063
2-6-3 Test Items (MISC Off–Line Test) (continued)
Table 2–5 MISC Off–Line Test Items (continued)

Test Item
5 OC Interface Test
1) Dual Port RAM W/R/V Test $2E
2) OCIF Internal Loop Test $2E
3) CPW–OCIF–MP Communication Test $2E
4) CPW–OCIF–MP–TP Communication Test $2E
5) CPW–OCIF–MP–GP Communication Test $2E
6) CPW–OCIF–MP–SP Communication Test $2E
7) CPW–OCIF–MP–SP–XG Comm. Test $2E
6 MFC Control Test
1) MFC Dual Port RAM W/R Test $26
2) MFC Status Test $26
3) MFC Interrupt Clear Test $26
7 RS232C Test
1) CBF SIO → AUX SIO Test $2F RS232C Loop
Connector
2) CBF SIO ← AUX SIO Test $2F

REV 0 2242063
2-7 SBPU OFF–LINE TEST

D SBPU Assy
D CPW Assy
D IPU Assy
D FDD
D SBB Assy
D Display Terminal
D FD (SBPU OFF–LINE TEST Software : P9190ZE)
2-7-2 Test Items (SBPU Off–Line Test)
Table 2–6 SBPU Off–Line Test Items

Test Item
No. Status CPW IPU DISP MISC SBPU Others
1 Memory Access Test

1) Pixel memory Write/Read/Verify Test $51
2) Convolved Data Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $52
3) Initial Channel Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $53
4) Sizing Image Memory Write/Read/Verify Test $54
5) Channel Increment Register W/R/V Test $55
6) Rotate Register Write/Read/Verify Test $56
7) Interrupt Mask Register Write/Read/Verify Test $57
2 Back Projection Test $58

REV 0 2242063
SECTION 3 – ETC BOARD TEST
The ETC Test programs contain the following:
D ETC POWER–ON TEST
D ETC OFF–LINE TEST
D ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION
Note
Each test for the ETC does not depend on OC self–diagnostics test (Power–ON/Off–Line tests), so
that both self–diagnostics tests of OC and ETC can be performed at the same time.

REV 0 2242063
3-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST
3-1-1 General
The ETC (DC–X Ethernet Controller Interface) Power–ON Test program is used for ETC self–diagnostics during the
Power up sequence, and is resident in the ROM on the ETC assy.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in ETC LEDs.
If at any point during the Power–ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the error code displays
on the ETC LEDs.
3-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs

The lower byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC process, the ETC Power–ON Test and current status in start–up sequence,
and the upper byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC status.
Illustration 3–1 ETC Board LED Configuration
: (For Hardware)
MSB (bit 15)

bit 14
:
:
Current Status (Interrupt etc.)
:
bit 8
bit 7
ETC Status Routine
bit 1
LSB (bit 0)

REV 0 2242063
3-1-3 Running the Test
Switch Setting
Set the DIP switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:
D SW8A – Power ON test Perform/Skip. Off–Line test setting.
Illustration 3–2 ETC Dip Switch Setting
ON ‘1’
1 2 3 4 ‘0’
B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’

B2 : Off–Line Test:
‘0’ – Not perform test
‘1’ – Perform test
B3 : Power On Test:
‘1’ – Skip test
Note
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the
DIP switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to
change the parameters, first set the DIP SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the
test.

REV 0 2242063
3-1-3 Running the Test (continued)
Test Sequence
The illustration 3–3 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the ETC test programs, including Power On Test proce-
dure, and where the results are displayed in LEDs.
Illustration 3–3 ETC Test Sequence Flowchart
System Test program ETC LED

Activity
Start $FF–$00
(Power On or Hardware test
Reset)
ETC P–ON
Test
Status Test Number
OK $01–$21
ETC Off–Line
Test
Status Test Number
OK $39–$40
ETC Initializing
&
Starting Up
Procedure
Status Test Group
OK $40–$8X
End
System $90
Preparation
Note
The ETC Off–Line test can be skipped by changing the ETC Dip switch setting (SW8A). For detail
information of this test, refer to Section 3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST.

REV 0 2242063
3-1-4 LED Indications
Test Items
Table 3–1 ETC Board LED Status (Power–On/Off–Line Test)
LED Status (F:Illuminate)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Hardware Test Mode Check fffffffF
LANCE (Ethernet Controller LSI) Invalid Access Check ffffffFf
DRAM Invalid Access Check ffffffFF
Dual Port RAM Invalid Access Check fffffFff
ETC Control Register Invalid Access Check fffffFfF
Invalid Address Access Check fffffFFf
SRAM Access check (Byte Mode) fffffFFF
SRAM Access Check (Word Mode) ffffFfff
SRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode) ffffFffF
Copying Program Initialized by CPU to SRAM ffffFfFf
Executing CPU Initialized Program ffffFfFF
EPROM Writing Check (Verify Bus Error) ffffFFff
LANCE Interrupt Control Register Test fffFffff
System Bus Interrupt control Register Test fffFfffF
Serial Port Interrupt Test fffFffFf
System Bus Interrupt Test fffFffFF
DRAM/Dual Port RAM control Register Test fffFfFff
DRAM Access Check (Byte Mode) fffFfFfF
DRAM Access Check (Word Mode) fffFfFFf
DRAM Access Check (Long Word Mode) fffFfFFF
Dual Poet RAM Access Check fffFFfff
LANCE Control Register Test fffFFffF
LANCE Internal Loop Back Test fffFFfFf
LANCE Collision Detect & Retry Test fffFFfFF
LANCE External Loop Back Test fffFFFff
Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 1) ffFfffff
Internal Bus Arbitration Test (Part 2) ffFffffF
ETC Off–line Test is being executed ffFFFffF
Hardware Test End fFffffff

REV 0 2242063
3-1-4 LED Indications (continued)
Table 3–2 ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & Starting–Up)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Supervisor Stack Pointer is being Set fFfffffF
Creating ‘Exception Vector Table’ fFffffFf
SRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped) fFffffFF
DRAM Test (Only Executed when Hardware Test is Skipped) fFfffFff
Setting Initialization of Selected OS fFfFffff
OS Initialization fFfFfffF
Serial Port Initialize fFfFFfff
System Clock Initialization fFfFFffF
System Bus I/F Initialization fFfFFfFf
RT Scope Pointer Initialization is being Set fFFfffff
RT Scope Initialization fFFffffF
RT Scope Start fFFffFff
Basic Task On ROM is being Executed fFFffFfF
Memory Partition is being Set fFFffFFf
Queue is being Set fFFffFFF
Semaphore Flag is being Made fFFfFfff
Mail Post is being Created/First Mail Transmit fFFfFffF
Alternate Table or Pointer is being Set fFFfFfFf
System Clock Start fFFfFFff
System Bus Interrupt Open (ETC Board is able to Communicate with CPU) fFFfFFfF
OS Start (Task Management Start) fFFFffff

REV 0 2242063
3-1-4 LED Indications (continued)
Table 3–2 ETC Board LED Status (Initializing & Starting–Up) (continued)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Special ETC Data is being Set fFFFfffF
ETC Preparation End/Waiting for Execute command from CPU fFFFffFf
Execute command Received from CPU fFFFFfff
Informing CPU of Execute Command fFFFFffF
Requesting I/F Manager Loading from CPU fFFFFfFf
I/F Manager Loading is being Executed fFFFFfFF
I/F Manager Loading End fFFFFFff
I/F Manager Start fFFFFFfF
Initialize Process Completed on ROM fFFFFFFF
Necessary Program is being loaded from CPU Ffffffff
ETC Application Program Management Start FffFffff

REV 0 2242063
3-1-5 Error Code

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the ETC fails during the power–up sequence.
Table 3–3 ETC Board Exception LED Status

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ROM Level does not match Program Level FfFfFffF
CPU Packet Writing Error FfFfFfFF
CPU Packet Transmit error FfFfFFff
Work Area is not Sufficient FfFfFFfF
File Read Error FfFfFFFf
Anything else Fatal Error FfFfFFFF
IP Address for Myself is not Set FfFFffff
Ethernet Address is not Set FfFFfffF
LANCE Initiate Error FfFFffFf
Initial Error of Memory for LANCE FfFFffFF
LANCE Initial Timeout FfFFfFff
Bus Error FFfFffff
Address Error FFfFfffF
Breach Command FFfFffFf
Division by Zero FFfFffFF
CHK/CHK2 Command FFfFfFff
TRAPcc/TRAPV Command FFfFfFfF
Privilege Breach FFfFfFFf
Execute Trace on Invalid Condition FFfFfFFF
Line 1010 Emulator FFfFFfff
Line 1111 Emulator FFfFFffF
Hardware Break Point on Invalid Condition FFfFFfFf
Processor Protocol Breach FFfFFfFF
Format Error FFfFFFff
In–Initial Interrupt FFfFFFfF
Standby RAM Destroyed/ETC Special Data is not Set FFfFFFFf

REV 0 2242063
3-1-5 Error Code (continued)
Table 3–3 ETC Board Exception LED Status (continued)

Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPRIUS Interrupt (Hardware Invalid) FFFfffff
Interrupt to Undefined Auto Vector FFFfffff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 1 or 1) FFFfFfff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 16 ∼ 23) FFFfFffF
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 48 ∼ 58) FFFfFfFf
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 59 ∼ 63) FFFfFfFF
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Vector 64 ∼ 225) FFFfFFff
Undefined Exception Occurrence (Except Above) FFFfFFFF
Undefined TRAP Occurrence FFFFffff
Table 3–4 ETC Board Current LED Status
LED Status
Description
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Fatal Hardware Error Ffffffff
Fatal Software Error fFffffff
ETC is Currently Stopped by Fatal Error ffFfffff
Waiting for Response Packet from CPU fffFffff
Waiting for ACK from System Bus ffffFfff
Interrupt from LANCE is Currently Managed fffffFff
PANIC in TCP/IP Driver ffffffFf
Idling Task is Currently Executed (Flashing) fffffff~
F : Illuminate ~ : Flashing

REV 0 2242063
3-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST

Note
Verify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet before entering this test. If this test is run
whit systems communicated, the communication data will be destroyed.
3-2-1 General
The Off–line test for the ETC Board is provided on the ROM on the ETC Board. The Off–line tests are interactive ones,
requiring an external display terminal.
The ETC test proceedings or error information occurred during the test execution are shown on the ETC status LEDs
as well as on the terminal display. The Status LEDs turn off when all the Off–line tests have been finished without an
error.
3-2-2 Required hardware

D ETC Assy
D AUI Cable
D Transceiver
D Display Terminal
Note
If the ETC board is not connected to the transceiver of the Ethernet cable via the AUI cable, set the
Ethernet loop back test disable on the operation mode selection screen. See illustration 3–5.

REV 0 2242063
3-2-3 Switch Setting

Set the Dip switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following:
D SW8A – Power On Test Perform/Skip. Off–Line test setting.
Illustration 3–4 ETC Dip Switch Setting (Off–Line Test)
ON ‘1’
1 2 3 4 ‘0’

B2 : Off–Line Test:
‘0’ – Not perform test
B3 : Power On Test:
‘1’ – Skip test
Note
The Dip switch setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the
Dip switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change
the parameters, first set the Dip switch accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.

REV 0 2242063
3-2-4 External display Terminal

Refer to Section 2-1-2, External Display Terminal, in this Operator Console tab.
3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation

1. Verify that the Dip switch (SW8A) on the ETC board is set to $C or $4 position (Off–Line Test ON).
2. Connect the external display terminal to the CN4 of the ETC Board.
3. Verify that no communication is performed on the Ethernet.
4. Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console. (The following displays on the external display terminal.)
5. Enternet the appropriate values for the operation mode, referring to the following table. Entries will be performed
in the shaded region of the illustration below.
Illustration 3–5 Operation Mode Selection
MC68332 initialization completed.

ETC Board initialization completed......12.256MByte available.
entering to OFFLINE test mode.....
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
ETC (Ethernet Controller interface) OFFLINE TEST v.0.00
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Select test_execution mode.
([0]:sequential mode or [1]:separate mode):[0]= 0 or 1
Select error_indication mode.
([0]:stop on error or [1]:non_stop on error):[0]= 0 or 1
Select test_skip mode.
([0]:external loop back test – –>[0]:enable or [1]:disable):[0]= 0 or 1
Item Entered Number

0 1
Test Execution Mode All tests are performed. Only selected tests are performed.
Error Indication Mode When error occurs, error information is dis- When error occurs, error information is
played and the test is terminated. displayed, but the test proceeds.
Test Skip Mode External loop back test can be performed. External loop back test is skipped.
Note
D Normally select ‘0’ to all entry items.
D when the AUI cable is not connected to the ETC board, always select ‘1’ in response to ‘Select test_skip
mode’.

REV 0 2242063
3-2-5 Off–Line Test Operation (continued)

6. The test menu screen appears on the terminal. Always select ‘0’ to perform all Off–Line tests in response to
‘Select Test Number’.
– – – – – – – MENU – – – – – – –
0=Internal bus/bus error test
0=Control/Status register test
.
.
Select test number:0 ‘CR’
The Off–Line test is performed automatically. It takes approximately 30 minutes to complete all tests. For each test
time and LED status, see the following:
Test Item LED Status Test Time (min.)

0 : Internal bus/bus error test $02 ∼ $06 3
1 : Control/Status register test $10 ∼ $14 2
2 : SRAM write/verify test $07 ∼ $0B 6
3 : DRAM write/verify test $15 ∼ $17 4
4 : dual port RAM write/verify test $18 1
5 : LANCE diagnostic test $19 ∼ $1C 6
6 : Internal bus arbitration test $20 ∼ $21 6
Note : At the moment ETC Off–Line Test is executed, LED status is $39.
Note
To terminate the Off–Line test during execution, press the <C> key while holding the <Control> key.

REV 0 2242063
3-3 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION

This test is performed to check if the Ethernet address data back–uped by the internal battery to the ETC board is
stored without error. If data is destroyed, first check if the internal battery has been consumed. Weak battery can not
back up the Ethernet data into the RAM. (Normally for 5 to 10 years, the internal battery can be used without replace-
ment.)
1. Connect the external terminal display to the CN4 of the ETC board.
2. Set the Dip switch (location:S6A) to the $4 position.
ON ‘1’
S6A
1 2 3 4 ‘0’
3. Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console.

The ETC Power–On test is executed. After approximately 30 seconds, the status LEDs are displayed as follows:
15 8 7 0
4. ETC initial setting screen appears on the terminal. Check if each item is set to the proper value according to the
Table below.
Item Entry Example

Manufactured Data 1994/03/03
Manufactured Time 12:34
Serial Number 0012 (Enter the same number as the ETC board.)
Ethernet Address OC (Enter the number that decodes the serial number (decimal) into the hexa–
decimal.)
5. Enter ‘y’ in response to ‘Are you sure (y/n)?’ to verify that the ETC board initial setting is properly done.
6. Verify that the ETC status LEDs are displayed as follows:
15 8 7 0

REV 0 2242063
SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION
The LEDs on circuit boars installed on the nest chassis indicate various status information.
The information in this section can be a help o identify failures occurred on boards.
4-1 CPW
TEST
7
6
5
4 These LEDs show the status during the Power–On Test
3 and Off–Line Test.
2 Refer to P–ON test to see more details.
1
0
RESET
INTERRUPT
HALT
FAIL

REV 0 2242063
4-2 IPU2
Status
7
6
Status LED
5
After the system starts up with no errors, bit 1 LED only
4 flashes at interval of approx. 1 second. Bit 0 ∼ 7 LEDs are
3 normally extinguished.
2
When performing reconstruction, bit 2 LED only is lit ON.
1
Others are normally extinguished.
0

REV 0 2242063
4-3 DISP
OVL (Overlay)
OVL It is lit ON when OVL screen is ON.
IMG (OVL screen is controlled by OVL ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)
FB1 IMG (Image)
It is lit ON when IFB (Image Frame Buffer) screen is ON.
DB1
(IFB screen is controlled by IMG ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)
FB1 (Frame Buffer 1)
VSYNC It is lit ON when FM1 (Frame Memory 1) displays.
SBUS (FM0/FM1 selection is controlled by IMG bit of DISPLAY IMG REG.)
DMA DB1 (DAS Buffer 1)
IOBUS It is lit ON when BUF1 is connected to IO BUs.
(BUF0/BUF1 selection to connect IO BUS is controlled by BUF bit of
BUF REG.)
VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization)
It is lit ON during VSYNC.
SBUS (System Bus)
It is lit ON during access from SYSTEM BUS.
DMA (Direct Memory Access)
It is lit ON during DMA to ACRTC.
IO BUS
It is lit ON during access from IO BUS.

REV 0 2242063
4-4 MISC
Status LED
These LEDs indicate status of Multi Format Camera.
LED MFC Status
$00 MFC Not Ready
$02 Rec. Mag. is Not Installed
$03 Sup. Mag. is Not Installed
Test $04 Film Empty or Sup. Mag. Shutter is Not Open
7 $05 Waiting Supply Command
6 $06 Waiting Expose Command
5 $07 CRT Positioning
4 $08 Exposing
3 $09 Expose n Complete
2 $0A Resetting
1 $0B Supply Error
$0C Receive error
0
$0D RAM Check Error 2000H
$0E RAM Check Error 3000H
$0F 7 Seg. No Light (Flashing)
$10 Developper Not Ready
$11 Rec. Mag. Full
$16 Film Overlap Error
3 $17 Lens Positioning Error
2 $1B Communication Error (Send)
1 $1C Video Signal Error
0 $1D Communication Error (Receive)
$1F Copy Mode (SSI Only)
(Not Used)
ROM SUM Check:
NO: Error
OFF:No Error
(Not Used)
Communication Program:
BLINK : Program Runs.
ON or OFF: Program does Not Run.

REV 0 2242063
4-5 ISC
DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):

It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE
(Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
DCD (Data Carrier Detected):
It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
For Serial Channel 0 Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (Data
DSR (DTR) Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
DCD RI (Ringing Indicator):
RI It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
(Not Used) Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem)
RST (Reset):
It is lit ON when the system is reset or the register reset on the
ISC board is performed.
RST DMA (Direct Memory Access Busy):
It is lit ON when SCA (Serial Communication Adapter) occupy
DMA
on – board BUS for DMA.
DTE0
DTE0 (CH0: Data Terminal Ready):
DTE1 It is lit ON when the serial channel 0 is set as DTE (i.e. Termi-
nal) using Dip switch.
DTE1 (CH1: Data terminal Ready):
It is lit ON when the serial channel 1 is set as DTE (i.e. Termi-
nal) using Dip switch.
For Serial Channel 1
DSR (DTR) DSR (DTR) (Data Set Ready or Data Terminal Ready):
DCD It is lit ON when DSR signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
RI Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DTR signal is received on DCE
(Not Used) (Data Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
DCD (Data Carrier Detected):
It is lit ON when DCD signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or DCD signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem).
RI (Ringing Indicator):
It is lit ON when RI signal is received on DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment, i.e. Terminal) or RI signal is sent on DCE (Data
Communication Equipment, i.e. Modem)

REV 0 2242063
4-6 ODC2 (OPTION)
Status
Status LED
These indicate, the status of ODC2 test specified by test SW on ODC2.
(Not Used)
FULL
FULL, EMP
EMP
These LED indicate the status of the FIFO buffer.
CRC D ‘FULL’ is lit ON when the FIFO is full.
CEN D ‘EMP’ is lit ON when the FIFO is empty.
BEN CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
It is lit ON when CRC error occurs during reading data.
CEN (CRC Enable)
It is lit ON when CRC is generated during writing data or when CRC is
checked during reading data.
BEN (Buffer Enable)
It is lit ON during transferring 512 byte data.

REV 0 2242063
4-7 MTC (OPTION)
FULL
HALF FULL, HALF, EMP
EMP These indicate number of data stored in 8kbyte FIFO One
of Three is lit ON according to the followings.
(Not Used)
FULL : 8Kbyte
HALF : 4K ∼ 8Kbyte
EMP : 0 byte
INTR
DMA INTR (Interrupt)
(Not Used) It is lit ON when interruption to MPU occurs.
FAIL (e.g., DMA completion, command packet receipt, bus error)
DMA (Direct Memory Access)

It is lit ON during DMA on MTC.
FAIL (Device Fail)

It is lit ON when MT unit power is turned off or control cable
is not connected.
T3
2 T3 ∼ 0 (Test Status)
Not used. Normally all LEDs are extinguished.
1
0

REV 0 2242063
4-8 ETC (OPTION)

Refer to Section 3. ETC Board Test.

REV 0 2242063
APPENDIX A – CREATING A CRASH SAVE DISKETTE
1. Insert the BOOT diskette into the floppy disk drive.
2. Set the boot select switch on CPW board as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4
3. Pull the system reset switch.
4. Initialize the diskette as follows:
a. Enter VINITS at keyboard.
Note
VINITS, not VINIT, command must be entered.
b. Remove the BOOT diskette, and insert a scratch diskette into the floppy disk drive.
Do not forget to set the write protect tab to the OFF position. (Write enable the scratch floppy.)
c. Enter parameters for diskette initialize.
> VINITS ‘CR’

WHAT DEVICE (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FD00 ‘CR’ – – – – – –(FD Device Name)
FLEXIBLE DISK: 2–DENSITY 2–SIDED
** TOTAL sector: 3991 **
VOLUME NAME: FD00
DESCRIPTION: gggggggggggggggggggg
DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’
** FORMATTING! **
** FORMATTED OK! **
DO YOU WANT TO VALIDATE SECTORS (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ‘CR’ – – –(FD Initialize Request)
VOLUME NAME (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FDMP ‘CR’ – – –(Volume Name)
USER NUMBER ? 0 ‘CR’ – – –(User No.)
DESCRIPTION (MAX. 20 CHARA.) ? CRASH SAVE AREA ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT IPLT LOADING (Y/N/Q) ? N ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SYSTEM DUMP AREA (Y/N/Q/) ? Y ‘CR’ –(Dump File Allocate Request)
WHAT FILE NAME (MAX. 8 CHARA.) ? DUMP ‘CR’ –(Dump File Name)
HOW MANY SECTORS (DECIMAL) ? 8 ‘CR’
** INITIALIZING ! **
** INITIALIZED: OK ! **
**** VINITS DONE ****
VINITS: TERMINATED
>
A–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

blank 2242063
A–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0 2242063
TABLE / GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-1 TGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
SECTION 2 – TGP POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
SECTION 3 – TGP OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-2 Sequential Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-1-4 Table Processor Bit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-2 GANTRY PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-2-1 I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-2-2 Sequential Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3-2-4 Gantry Processor Bit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-1 Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-2 Servo Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-1-3 Resetting the Servo Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-2 SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SERVO AMP. (P9153SF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
i TABLE/GANTRY
blank 2242063
ii TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS
1-1 LED DESCRIPTION
1-1-1 TGP Board

The TGP board has 16 Status LEDs.
ERRA Gantry Processor detected an error, or Gantry Processor is in an error condition.

This LED lights when error(s) occurred in the Gantry Processor System.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM Check Error
D Gantry Azimuth Initialize Error
Refer to the TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.
LOOPA Indicates that the interval timer function of the Gantry Processor is operating. Flashes ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’
for every second cycle during normal Gantry Processor operation.
REQA The Gantry Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor (CPW).
MNLA Lights up while the Gantry Processor executing a manual mode Program.
ERRB Table Processor detected an error, or Table Processor in sin an error condition.
This LED lights when error(s) occur in the Table Processor System.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM check Error
D MISC ↔ Table Processor Serial communication error
Refer to TGP Diagnostics Section of this manual.
LOOPB Indicates that the interval timer function of the Table Processor is operating. Flashes ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’
for every second cycle during normal Table Processor operation.
REQB The Table Processor is executing a program requested by the Scan Processor.
MNLB Lights up while the Table Processor executing a manual mode Program.
HVON Lights up when the TGP outputs the ‘HV ON’ signal to the X–ray Generator.
DTRIG It indicates the DAS trigger while in DAS ENABLE mode.
SVE Lights up while the servo Amp is enabled.
SVALM Lights up when the servo Alarm is detected.
GLIMT Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Limit switch is actuated.
(or) Cable check switch in the Gantry Take–up is actuated.
TBLSTOP Lights up when the TGP loses control of the cradle In/Out operation.
CCWR Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CCW rest position.
CWR Lights up when the Gantry Azimuth Rest Position sensor detects CW rest position.
1–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp.

The Gantry Servo Amp. contains a 7 segment LED which indicates Servo Amp. failure modes.
For Servo Amp. 2198990
SV–OFF Indicates that Servomechanism is OFF.
SV–ON Indicates normal control with Servomechanism ON.
CUR Indicates over–current of output circuit.
LOAD Indicates motor overload.
SPEED Indicates motor over–speed.
TEMP Indicates abnormal driver temperature.
ECD Indicates open circuit for Encoder signal.
PS Indicates abnormal power supply board.
PWR Indicates that power for motor drive is OFF.
CPU Indicates uncontrollable CPU
1–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
1-1-2 Gantry Servo Amp. (continued)
For Servo Amp. P9153SF
OVER CURRENT:
O.C
Indicates over current in output circuit
OVER LOAD:
O.L
Indicates motor over load
OVER HEAT:
O.H
Indicates overheating of the Power Transistor
CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF:

F.E
Indicates that the input circuit breaker has been tripped
DYNAMIC BREAKER FUNCTION FAIL:

P.E
Indicates dynamic break function failure.
SPEED ERROR:
S.E
Indicates excessive motor speed (120% of maximum speed)
VOLTAGE ERROR (POWER FAIL):

V.E
Indicates input voltage failure (85% or less than normal operational voltage)
COMMUTATION ERROR:
C.E
Indicates commutation signal failure
(No Display) Power is not applied or Normal operating status
The Servo Amp. also contains 5 LEDs which indicate the following conditions as shown in Table 1–1.
Table 1–1 Servo Amp. LED
LED Color Description

RGSO Green Indicates that Servo Amp. is ready to operate when lit.
R.S Green Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.
Indicates external reset of Servo Amp.
+15 Green Indicates that +15V power is OK when lit.
–15 Green Indicates that –15V power is OK when lit.
C.L (T.H) Green Not used for CT Sytec/Sytec i series.
Indicates that external current limit or torque hold operation is working.
1–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH

Tables 1–2 and 1–3 show the functions of the TGP DIAG. Dip switches.
Table 1–2 Diag. Dip Switch (Gantry Processor)
Switch No. Description

S1 ON : Disables Aperture Check.
S2 ON : Disables Gantry Rotation Initialize.
S3 ON : Measure the Gantry rotation Time in OFF LINE TEST #401.
S4 Gantry MID speed select
OFF : MID = 2.7 sec/rev
ON : MID = 3.6 sec/rev
S5 ON : Positioning Light 0/270 degree mode
Gantry Light Switch is Pressed Once Light Switch is Pressed Twice
Position
0° Light ON or OFF (toggle) Gantry rotates to 270° position,
then Light is lit ON.
270° Light ON or OFF (toggle) Gantry returns to 0° position,
then Light is lit ON
Other than Gantry returns to 0° position, Gantry rotates to 270° position,
0° and 270° then Light is lit ON. then Light is lit ON.
S6 Gantry Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.
S7
S8 Disables Gantry Processor ROM Check.
Disables Gantry Processor Watchdog Timer function.
Table 1–3 Diag. Dip Switch (Table Processor)
Switch No. Description

S9 Disables Scan Status Check.
Disables Automatic –150mm Table height stop.
Disables Automatic zero degree tilt stop.
S10 Not Used.
S11 Disables the interlock function for Table up/down and Gantry Tilt.
S12 ON : Cradle IN limit short mode.
S13 OFF : CT Sytec mode.
S14 Table Processor OFF LINE TEST selection.
S15
S16 Disables Table Processor ROM check.
Disables Table Processor watchdog timer function.
1–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 2 – TGP POWER–ON TEST
The TGP contains two Micro Processors. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)
Theses processors execute the following programs independently power is applied or reset occurs.
D Gantry Processor – RAM Check

– ROM Check
– Gantry Azimuth Rotation Check and Gantry Azimuth Initialize.
D Table Processor – RAM Check
– ROM Check
– Display Check
2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR
RAM Check
The Gantry Processor performs memory READ/WRITE response checks for the micro processor internal RAM and
external RAM.
D PD78310 internal RAM

ADDRESS FE00 ∼ FEEF
D RAM (16S45)
ADDRESS C000 ∼ C7FF
This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.
If the Gantry Processor detects and error, ii displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRA, LOOPA, REQA and MNLA LESs ON.
If the test passes, LOOPA LED blinks.
2–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
2-1 GANTRY PROCESSOR (continued)
ROM Check
The Gantry Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address

ADDRESS 0 ∼ BFFF (ROM Sum data is in address 00FF.)
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it indicates the error on the LEDs as follows:
ERRA, REQA and MNLA LEDs ON.
If successful, LOOPA LED blinks.
Gantry Rotation Check and Initialize

The Gantry Processor performs the Gantry Rotation Check and azimuth position initialization after completion of the
ROM Check. The following chart shows initializing operations:
Illustration 2–1 CCW Rest Area
Home
0° End of CCW Rest Area
3
4 2 10° + 5°
33°
CCW Rest Area
2–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Illustration 2–2 Gantry Initialize Operation
START
Check TGP Manual

Switch Status
Indicates Status on LEDs

ERRA and LOOPA Alternate MNL SYS tor MNL
‘ON’ and ‘OFF’. Position ?
SYS
Check Azimuth
Position
NO CCW Rest
Area ?
YES
2
Rotate Gantry to
CCW Direction 1
Rotate Gantry to
CW Direction
Initialize Azimuth
Position Counter by
G.Pulse.
Out of CCW NO
3 Rest Area ?
Stop Gantry at –33°
Position YES
4 Stop Gantry Rota-

Rotate Gantry to tion at 10°
CW Direction
Stop Gantry at
HOME (0°)
2–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063

If the Gantry Processor detects an error during the Rotation check and Initialization, the Gantry Processor Stops
Gantry rotation and displays an error via the LEDs and the Gantry processor hangs up (stops operations).
Table 2–1 Error Lists and LED Status
LED Status
Error List
ERRA SVALM GLIMT
Servo Alarm ON ON –
Gantry Limit Position Error (or) Cable Check switch Error ON – ON
Gantry Not Rotating ON – –
Gantry Over Speed ON – –
–33 degree Position Check Error ON – –
G.Pulse Not Detected during Rotation to –33 degree Position ON – –
Gantry did not Reach Home within 10sec of CW Rotation Toward ON – –
the Home Position
2–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR
RAM Check
The Table Micro Processor performs a memory READ/WRITE response check on the micro processor internal RAM
and external RAM.
D PD78310 internal RAM

ADDRESS FE00 ∼ FEEF
D RAM (16S45)
ADDRESS C000 ∼ C7FF
This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.
If the Table Processor detects an error, if displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRB, LOOPB REQB and MNLB LEDs ON
If successful, LOOPB LED blinks.
ROM Check
The Table Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address 0 ∼ 3FFF (ROM Sum data is in 00FF)
If the Table Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRB, REQB and MNLB LEDs ON
If successful, LOOPB LED blinds.
2–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
2-2 TABLE PROCESSOR (continued)
Display Check
The Table Processor performs the display check program after the ROM Check.
Table 2–2 lists the Gantry Panel Switch and Gantry display LED display check patterns.
Table 2–2 Gantry Display Check Pattern
Gantry Display Gantry Switch

Ptn FWD BWD D8 D7 D6 Posn Hgh – D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Up Down In
0 f f
1 f f
2 f f
3 f
4 f f
5 f f
6 f f
7 f
8 f f
9 f f
10 – – – – – – – – f
11
2–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 3 – TGP OFF–LINE TEST
3-1 TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST

The TGP Assembly contains two micro processor system. (i.e., Gantry Processor and Table Processor)
Theses Processor systems can execute the OFF–LINE programs used for subsystem Adjustment, Functional Check
and Diagnostics.
Each Processor holds test programs in its own PROM. Execute each Processor’s OFF–LINE TEST program inde-
pendently with the DIAG switches and test switches.
The Micro Processor displays the test results and/or error on the Gantry Display Panel, so it requires a normally oper-
ating TABLE Processor display function. Execute the OFF–LINE TEST program after successful completion of the
TABLE PROCESSOR DISPLAY TEST.
The OFF–LINE TEST program performs three operations:
D Real Time Monitor Mode (I/O Status Check)

Use this mode to monitor Table /Gantry subsystem position information.
[Cradle Position, Table height, Tilt Angle (Table Processor) and Azimuth Position (Gantry Processor)] and
Status of Micro Processor’s I/O ports.
D Response Test Mode (Sequential function Test)

Micro Processor performs I/O port response check, internal timer function check, internal pulse generator
function check, cradle drive operation check (Table Processor) and Collimator drive operation check
(Gantry Processor).
D Simulate Test Mode (I/O Port Bit Check Tool)

Use this test mode to manipulate output port bits selected by test switches.
Use the Gantry Panel Switches to set bit data for the Table Processor test. Use the TGP manual switches
to set bit data for Gantry Processor Test.
3–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check

1. Set S14 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.
Press the ‘Reset’ wwitch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display shows the Test Number (000) and cradle position
value in decimal form.
Example Value
2. To select the test program, press the TEST switch on TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time you
press the test switch until it reaches
The Test Number loops back to after . (i.e., Loop 000 ∼ 013)
Use Test Number 000 ∼ 002 to monitor the CRADLE POSITION, TABLE HEIGHT and TILT ANGLE.
(i.e., AD CONVERTER VALUE)
Use Test Number 003 ∼ 011 to monitor I/O PORT STATUS.
Use Test Number 012 and 013 to monitor ERROR CODE and ROM SUM DATA of ROM Check.
Table 3–1 ∼ 3–3 shows the bit assignment of the I/O port.
3. To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Illustration 3–1 Diag. Swishes
Reset
Test A
CPU CPU
Test B
H0
HG
P0
PG
T0
TG
S9 S1
ON ON
OFF S16 OFF S8
Table Processor Gantry Processor

Diag. Switch Diag. Switch
3–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-1 I/O Port Status Check (continued)
Table 3–1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check
Test Number Test Display

000 CRADLE POSITION D Zero Position; Cradle Mechanical Out limit.
Display Cradle Absolute D 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0100 → 50mm away from Zero Position
Position in decimal form.
CRADLE LIMIT POSITION

In Limit Out Limit
10
3050 (5mm)
(1525mm)
SCANNABLE RANGE
3050 10
(1525mm) (5mm)
D If the cradle is within the range of 0 ∼ 30 (0mm ∼ 15mm),

the Table can be lowered to –600mm.
001 TABLE HEIGHT D Zero Position ; Table height –605mm form ISO center.
Display Table Height in (Mechanical lowest position from ISO center is –610mm)
decimal form. D 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0010 → Table height –600mm
Display 1210 → Table Height 0mm
D Up direction (+)
002 TILT ANGLE D Zero Position ; Tilt FWD 25.5°.
Display Tilt Angle in deci- D 0.1°/digit. (e.g.) Display 0005 → FWD25°
mal. Display 0255 → 0°
Display 0505 → BWD 25°
D BWD direction (+)
3–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check (continued)
Test Number Description

003 Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and foot Switch Status.
Address FFB4
004 Display Gantry Panel Switch Status and OC Panel Switch Status.
Address FFB5
005 Display Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT0.
006 Display Input Port Status of Table Processor PORT1 in complement number.
007 Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT2.
008 Display Input/Output Port Status of Table Processor PORT3.
009 Display Scan Control Port Status.
Address FFB0
010 Display status of Table Processor Status LED Control Port.
Address FFB1
011 Display Status of ADC Control and Gantry Panel LED Control Port.
Address FFB2
012 Display Error Code while ERRB LED ON.
 on condition that TABLE PROCESSOR works properly
 (i.e.) LOOPG LED ALTERNATES ON, OFF 
Bit Assignments is :
Bit 7 : Micro Processor hung–up
Bit 6 : Not Used
Bit 5 : Not Used
Bit 4 : Not Used
Bit 3 : Communication Error TG ⇐ OC (No ACK/NAC Response from OC.)
Bit 2 : Communication Error TG ⇒ OC (Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)
Bit 1 : Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)
Bit 0 : Communication Error (Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready
when ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)
013 Display ROM SUM Check Data
is displayed when ROM SUM Check is completed successfully.
Note: ACK : Acknowledge

NAC : Non–Acknowledge
XMT : Transmission
3–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–2 Bit Assignment of I/O Port
Index Device Data Bit Description

U3F
RD5B D7 : FAST D7=1 ; FAST switch is depressed
Gantry Panel Switch Status D6 : ZERO D6=1 ; ZERO switch is depressed
and OC Panel Switch Status D5 : MTS D5=1 ; Move to Scan switch is depressed
D4 : POSI D4=1 ; Positioning Light ON switch is depressed
(FFB4) D3 : HEIGHT D3=1 ; Height switch is depressed
D2 : RANGE D2=1 ; Range switch is depressed
D1 : SCAN D1=1 ; Scan set switch on OC Panel is depressed
D0 : Not Used
U3E
RD4B D7 : IN D7=1 ; IN switch is depressed
Gantry Panel Switch Status D6 : OUT D6=1 ; OUT switch is depressed
and Foot Switch Status D5 : UPR D5=1 ; UP switch is depressed
D4 : DNR D4=1 ; DOWN switch is depressed
(FFB3) D3 : FWDR D3=1 ; FORWARD switch is depressed
D2 : BWDR D2=1 ; BACKWARD switch is depressed
D1 : FUPR D1=1 ; Foot switch; UP is depressed
D0 : FDNR D0=1 ; Foot switch; DOWN is depressed
U3J
WR2B D7 : – Not Used
ADC Control and Gantry Panel D6 : – Not Used
Switch LED Control D5 : ADSEL 1 ADC Input Selection D5 0 0 1
D4 : ADSEL 0 D4 0 1 1
(FFB2) ↓ ↓ ↓
Height Position Tilt
D3 : – Not Used
D2 : DNLED Gantry Panel SW D2=1 ; DOWN LED ON
D1 : UPLED Gantry Panel SW D1=1 ; UP LED ON
D0 : INLED Gantry Panel SW D0=1 ; IN LED ON
U5Q  Control LED ON/OFF
WR1B D7 : ERR.B 
µProcessor (B) Status LED D6 : LOOP.B 
Control D5 : OCREQ.B 
D4 : MNL.B 
(FFB1) D3 :  Not Used
D2 : 
D1 : 
D0 : 
U7E
WR0B D7 : – Not Used
Scan Control (by Table Proces- D6 : T.SCAN Scan Mode Control D6=1 ; Table scan
sor) D5 : T.DENA DAS Control D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS Enable
D4 : THVON HV ON Control D4=1 ; HV ON by Table Processor
(FFB0) D3 : Not Used
D2 : Not Used
D1 : Not Used
D0 : T.OFFSET DAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode
D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Table Processor
3–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–3 Bit assignment of Processor Port
Port Bit Description

P0 (OUT) Bit 7 : INTREQ A Interrupt Request to Gantry Processor
Bit 6 : Not Used
Port 0 Bit 5 : BWDE Bit 5 = 1 ; Tilt Backward Enable
Bit 4 : FWDE Bit 4 = 1 ; Tilt Forward Enable
Bit 3 : DNE Bit 3 = 1 ; Table Down Enable
Bit 2 : UPE Bit 2 = 1 ; Table Up Enable
Bit 1 : TBLDRV Bit 1 = 1 ; Cradle Drive
Bit 0 : IN Bit 0 = 1 ; Cradle IN, Bit 0 = 0 ; Cradle OUT
P1 (IN) Bit 7 : Test Test Switch S9 ∼ S16 Status
: Switch Bit 0 ∼ 7 ; 0 = Switch ON
Port 1 Bit 0 : Data
P2 Bit 7 :– Not Used
Bit 6 : GSCAN (IN) Bit 6 = 1 ; Gantry Scan Mode
Port 2 Bit 5 : OTCOM (SIO) Serial Communication OC → Table Processor
Bit 4 : TOCOM (SIO) Serial Communication Table Processor → OC
Bit 3 : SCANRST (INTR IN) Bit 3 = 1 ; Scan End: Interrupt from 8253 (View Control Counter)
Bit 2 : COMINT (INTR IN) Bit 2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Gantry µP
Bit 1 : ADINT (INTR IN) Bit 1 = 1 ; Interrupt from ADC
Bit 0 : TESTB (INTR IN) Bit 0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt
P3 Bit 7 : TTRG (PLS OUT) Table Processor DAS Trigger
Bit 6 : TBLPLS (PLS OUT) Cradle drive Pulse
Port 3 Bit 5 : TBLERR (IN) Table Error Bit5 = 1 ; Cradle Error
Bit 4 : UNLATCH (IN) Cradle Unlatch Bit4 = 1 ; Cradle Unlatch
Bit 3 : OUTDRV (COUNTER) Cradle Out
Bit 2 : INDRV (COUNTER) Cradle In
Bit 1 : OUTPLS (COUNTER) Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle Out
Bit 0 : INPLS (COUNTER) Cradle Encoder Pulse, Cradle In
Note
INTR : Interrupt
SIO : Serial Input–Output
PLS : Pulse
COUNTER : Input to Counter
3–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-2 Sequential Function Test

In this test, Table Processor sequences through the following tests:
D Table Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test
D Table Processor Internal Counter Function Test
D Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test
D Cradle In/Out drive Operation Test
When the Table Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry Display.
1. Move the cradle approximately 500mm from the out limit position.
2. Set S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.
3. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board,
The Gantry Display shows the Test Number (100) and cradle position value in decimal form.
4. Press ‘TEST B’ switch on the TGP board to start test.
The Gantry Display shows the following when all tests complete successfully.
Table 3–4 shows the error code for each test.
3–7 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-2 Sequential Function Test (continued)
Table 3–4 Table Processor Sequential Function Test
Test Test Description

Number
100 I/O Port D Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of the Table Processor.
| Response Check D Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on the Gantry Display if error
147 detected.
(i.e.)
D Test Number Read Data of Processor in

D Show Bit4 decimal number
100 WR0B Address FFB0 : Scan Control Port

| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U4Q and U4R on the TGP board.
107 Response Check Refer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.
110 WR1B Address FFB1 : Status LED Control Port
| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U5Q and U5R on the TGP board.
120 WR2B Address FFB2 : ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control Port
| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U3H and U5J on the TGP board.
140 P0 Table Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.
| I/O Port Refer to Table 3–3 of this section for Bit Assignment.
147 response Check
160 Time Base D Check the Table Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function
Counter Check D Interval Timer repeat period 10.9msec.
D Error Indication
161 DAS Trigger D Check Table Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.
Pulse Generator D Check 8253 Timer Function
& D Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger and outputs to Timer 8253 from pin 42.
DAS Trigger D Timer 8253 generates interrupt (INTE 2) after it counts 64 DAS trigger pulse.
Counter Function D If Timer 8253 does not generate INTE 2 interrupt, Table Processor indicates error.
Check D Error Indication
3–8 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–4 Table Processor Sequential Function Test (continued)
Test Test Description Error

Number
170 Cradle Drive D Test 170 ∼ 171 are done through the following Cradle Operation
Pulse Generator Check.
and (1) Set 3 seconds on to Watch dog Timer.
Cradle Encoder
Check (2) Move Cradle 20mm IN.
(3) Check Cradle position.
If cradle does not reach to 20mm position within 3 second,
Table processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.
170 Cradle Position (4) Check interrupt from Cradle Position Encoder Pulse Counter.
& Encoder Pulse If interrupt is not generated before completion of 20mm cradle
171 Counter travel. Table Processor indicates error on the Gantry Display.
Functional
Check (5) Move Cradle 20mm OUT.
(6) Check Cradle Position [Same as step (3)] If error →
(7) Check Interrupt. [Same as step (4)] if error →
172 Cradle Drive (8) Move Cradle 20mm IN.
Un–controlled (9) Cradle will be stopped by Un–controlled Fail Detection Circuit
Fail Detection TBLSTP LED lights ON.
Circuit Check
If Un–controlled Fail Detection Circuit does not work,
Table Processor indicates error.
3–9 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.
D Switch OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Scan’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
D Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.
D Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker.
D Insert the azimuth lock pin.
1. Set S14 and S15 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’
position. (Bit 0) In Up
2. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board, the Gantry Display shows
the Test Number (200) and cradle position value in decimal form. (Bit 1) Fast Height (Bit 3)
(Bit 2) Out Down

3. Press ‘TEST B’ switch once on the TGP board.
The Gantry Display shows the following:
Move to (Bit 4)
FWD
Scan
Test Number Bit Status of Port (Bit 5)

BWD Zero
4. Set I/O Port Bit.
Example: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit3 to ‘High’
(Bit 6) Range Light (Bit 7)
(i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Height] switches)
The Gantry Display shows :
Bit7:0 Bit5:0 Bit3:1 Bit1:1

0 0 2 3
3–10 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-3 I/O Port Bit Check (continued)
5. To select the next test, press the ‘TEST B’ switch. The Gantry Display shows:
6. To select test (210), press the ‘TEST B’ switch once again. The Gantry Display shows:
7. Set I/O Port Bit

Example: Set Bit0, Bit1 and Bit5 to ‘High’ (i.e., press [In], [Fast], [Zero] switches).
The Gantry Display shows:

0 2 0 3
8. The Test number increase each time you press the ‘TEST B’ switch until it reaches 240.
The Test number loops pack to 200 after 240.
If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
9. To exit this Test Mode: Move S14 and S15 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Table 3–5 I/O Port Bit Check Program (Table Processor)

Number
200 WR0B Address FFB0 : Scan Control
I/O Port Bit Set/Clear Test Bit Set/Clear Test
Refer to Table 3–2 of this section for Bit Assignment.
210 WR1B Address FFB1 : Status LED Control
220 WR2B Address FFB2 : ADC and Gantry Panel LED Control
240 Table Processor P0 Port Bit Table Processor Output Port Bit Set/Clear Test
Set/Clear Test Refer to Table 3–3 of this section for Bit Assignment.
If Set data and Read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
3–11 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-1-4 Table Processor Bit Table
Table 3–6 Table Processor Bit Table
Port Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P0 INTERCA BWDE FWDE DNE UPE TBLDRV IN
(OUT)
P1
(IN) S16 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S9
P2 GSCAN OGCOM TOCOM SCANRST COMINT ADINTR TESTB
(IN) (SIO) (SIO) (INTR) (INTR) (INTR)
P3 TTRG TBLPLS TBLERR UNLATCH OUTDRV INDRV OUTPLS INPLS
(PLS) (PLS) (IN) (counter) (counter) (counter) (counter)
3–12 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-2 GANTRY PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST
3-2-1 I/O Port Status Check

1. Set S6 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.
2. Press the ‘Reset’ switch of the TGP Board.
Example Value
3. To select the Test program, press the ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board. The Test Number increases each time
you press the test switch until it reaches 414.
The Test Number Loops back to 400 after 414.
3–13 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–7 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

Number
400 Azimuth Position D Zero Position; –180° Position
D 1°/digit
(e.g.) CCW 3sec Rest Position = –71° Display = 109
HOME = 0° Display = 180
CW 2sec Rest Position = 431° Display = 611
401 Gantry Rotation Time D Display the time from HOME position to HOME position.
D 10msec/digit
(e.g.) Time = 1.825sec Display = 0183
Time = 20737sec Display = 0274
402 Gantry Driving Time D Display the time from Rest position to Rest position.
D 10msec/digit
(e.g.) Time = 1.825 Display = 0320
Time = 2.737 Display = 0440
The procedure of TEST401 and 402 as follows:
a. Set display mode to TEST No. 401 or 402.
b. Flip on S3 of the Dip SW.
c. Rotate the Gantry from CW(CCW) REST position to CCW(CW)
REST position by MNL and FIX SW on the TGP board.
d. TGP measures and displays the time.
(Display indicates 0000 during measuring the time.)
e. Flip off S3 of Dip SW after the TEST.
403 RD4A I/O Port Display TGP Manual Switch Status.
Address FFB4
Refer to Table bor Bit Assignment.
404 RD5A I/O Port Display Aperture Status and Gantry Rest Position Status in Complement
Number
Address FFB5
Refer to Table for Bit Assignment.
405 Processor Port 0 Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 0.
Refer to Table 3–9 for Bit Assignment.
406 Processor Port 1 Display Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 1 in Complement
Number
407 Processor Port 2 Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 2.
408 Processor Port 3 Display Input/Output Port Status of Gantry Processor Port 3.
3–14 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–7 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

Number
409 WR0A I/O Port Display Positioning Light and Scan Control Port Status.
Address FFB0
410 WR1A I/O Port Display Status of Gantry Processor Status lED Control Port.
Address FFB1
411 D/A Converter Status Display Input Data to D/A Converter in decimal (0 ∼ 4095).
MSB = Bit 7 of Address
LSB = Bit 4 of Address
412 – Display Error Code while ERRA LED ON.
ON condition that Gantry Processor works properly 
(i.e.) LOOPA LED alternates ON, OFF 
Bit Assignment is:
Bit 7 : Micro Processor hung–up
Bit 6 : Gantry rotation Initializing error
Bit 5 : Gantry Rotation Over Speed
Bit 4 : Gantry not rotate
Bit 3 : Communication error TG ⇒ OC
(No ACK/NAC Response from OC)
Bit 2 : Communication Error TG ⇐ OC
(Table Processor has sent NAC 3 times.)
Bit 1 : Communication Error
(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready.)
Bit 0 : Communication Error
(Communication Device of TG is not XMT Ready when
ACK/NAC XMT is requested.)
413 – Display ROM SUM check Data
Displayed when ROM SUM Check is completes successfully.
414 Rotate Peek Speed Counts the encoder pulses every 10.9msec during scan and displays their
maximum value.
Example: When the Gantry rotates at the speed of 3.079sec/Rotation,
the Gantry Display shows the following value ideally.
14,256(pulse/rot) × 10.9(msec)
3.097 × 1,000(msec/rot)
Practically, about 4 counts greater than this value will be displayed due to
the overshoot of rotation.
Note ACK : Acknowledge
NAC : Non–acknowledge
XMT : Transmission
3–15 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–8 Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor)

U6E
RD5A D7 : APT10 (D7 = 0) Aperture is set 10mm position.
Aperture D6 : APT5 (D6 = 0) Aperture is set 5mm position.
Status and D5 : APT2 (D5 = 0) Aperture is set 2mm position.
Gantry D4 : APT1 (D4 = 0) Aperture is set 1mm position.
Azimuth D3 : CWR (D3 = 0) Gantry at CW Rest position.
Status D2 : CCWR (D2 = 0) Gantry at CCW Rest position.
D1 : SVALM Servo Alarm is detected.
(FFB5) D0 : GLIMT (D0 = 1) Gantry reached to CW or CCW Limit
(or) Cable Check Switch is actuated.
U7C
RD4A D7 : SYS D7 = 1 ; SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to SYS position
TGP Manual D6 : MNL D6 = 1 ; SYS/OFF/MNL switch is placed to MNL position
Switch Status D5 : CW D5 = 1 ; CW/HOME/CCW switch is placed to CW position
D4 : CCW D4 = 1 ; CW;home/CCW switch is placed to CCW position
(FFB4) D3 : ARG D3 = 1 ; ARB/SVE/FIX switch is placed to ARB position
D2 : FIX D2 = 1 ; ARB/SVE FIX switch is placed to FIX position
D1 : FAST D1 = 1 ; FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to FAST position
D0 : SLOW D0 = 1 ; FAST/MID/SLOW switch is placed to SLOW position
U8R
WR3A D7 : Bit 9  Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6)
DAC Data D6 : Bit 10 
(Lower Bit) D5 : Bit 11 
D4 : Bit 12 
(FFB3) D3 :  Not Used
D2 : 
D1 : 
D0 : 
U8T Input Data to Digital to Analog Convertor (IC6)
WR2A D7 : Bit 1
DAC Data D6 : Bit 2
(Higher Bit) D5 : Bit 3
D4 : Bit 4
(FFB2) D3 : Bit 5
D2 : Bit 6
D1 : Bit 7
D0 : Bit 8
3–16 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–8 Bit Assignment of I/O Port (Gantry Processor) (continued)

U6C
WR1A D7 : ERR.A  Control LED ON/OFF
µProcessor D6 : LOOP.A 
(A) Status D5 : OCREQ.A 
LED Control D4 : MNL.A 
D3 :  Not Used
(FFB1) D2 : 
D1 : 
D0 : 
U7E
WR0A D7 : P–Light On Positioning Light Control ; D7=1 ; Positioning Light ON
Positioning D6 : GSCAN Scan Mode Control ; D6=1 ; Gantry Scan
Light and D5 : T.DENA DAS Control ; D5=1 ; Table Processor DAS ENABLE
Scan Control D4 : GPHVON HV ON Control ; D4=1 ; HV ON by Gantry Pulse
(by Gantry D3 : SVON Axial drive Control ; Servo ON D3=1 ; Release Hold Brake
Processor) D2 : HOMERST Axial drive Control ; Azimuth Position Rest D2=1 ; Move Gantry to Home
D1 : – Not Used
(FFB0) D0 : G.OFFSET DAS Control ; Offset Data Collection Mode
D0=1 ; Offset Data Collection by Gantry Processor
3–17 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–9 Bit Assignment of Processor Port (Gantry Processor)
Port Bit Description

P0 (OUT) Bit 7 : INTREQ B Interrupt Request to Table Processor
Port 0 Bit 6 : APTPLS (PLS OUT) aperture Pulse ; Pulse for Aperture Drive
Bit 5 : APRST Aperture Reset ; Bit5 = 0 Aperture Reset
Bit 4 : BRK Brake ; Bit4 = 0 Dynamic Brake Mode
Bit 3 : SVE Servo Enable ; Bit3 = 0 Servo Enable
Bit 2 : CW/CCW CW SCAN / CCW SCAN ; DAS Control ; Bit2 = 1 CW Scan
; Bit1 = 0 CCW Scan
Bit 1 : SPD2 Scan Speed Code ; DAS Control ; Indicate Scan Speed to DAS
Bit 0 : SPD1
P1 (IN) Bit7 : Test SW Data Test Switch S1 ∼ S8 Status
Port 1  Bit0 ∼ Bit 7 ; 0 = Switch ON
Bit0 :
P2 Bit 7 :– Not Used
Port 2 Bit 6 : TSCAN (IN) Bit6 = 1 ; Table Scan Mode
Bit 5 : OGCOM (SIO) Serial Communication OC → Gantry Processor
Bit 4 : GOCOM (SIO) Serial Communication Gantry Processor → OC
Bit 3 :– Not Used
Bit 2 : COMINT (INTR IN) Bit2 = 1 ; Communication Interrupt from Table Processor
Bit 1 : HOME (INTR IN) Bit1 = 1 ; Interrupt from Gantry Pulse Photo Switch
Gantry at Home position
Bit 0 : TESTA (INTR IN) Bit0 = 1 ; Test Switch Interrupt
P3 Bit 7 : GTRG (PLS OUT) Gantry Processor DAS Trigger
Port 3 Bit 6 :– Not Used
Bit 5 :– Not Used
Bit 4 : POSL (IN) Bit4 = 1 ;Positioning Light ON
Bit 3 :– Not Used
Bit 2 : DTRG (COUNTER) DAS Trigger Pulse
Bit 1 : CCWPLS (COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CCW Rotation)
Bit 0 : CWPLS (COUNTER) Azimuth Encoder Pulse (CW Rotation)
Note INTR : Interrupt
SIO : Serial Input–Output
PLS : Pulse
COUNTER : Input to Counter
3–18 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-2-2 Sequential Function Test

In this test, processor sequences through the following tests:
D Gantry Processor I/O Port Read/Write Response Test
D Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function Test
D Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function Test
D Collimater Drive Operation Test
When the Gantry Processor detects an error, it displays an error code on the Gantry display and stop the test program.
1. Set S7 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.
3. Press ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board to start test.
Table shows the error code for each test.
3–19 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–10 Gantry Processor Sequential Function Test

Number
500 I/O Port D Read/Write Response Check for the I/O Port of Gantry Processor (U7L)
| Response Check D Indicate Test Number and Bit Number on Gantry display if error detected.
547
(i.e.)
D Test Number Read Data of Processor in

D Show Bit 4 decimal Number
500 WR0A Address FFB0 : Positioning Light and Scan Control Port
| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U7E and U7D on the TGP board.
510 WR1A Address FFB1 : Status LED Control Port
I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U6C and U6D on the TGP board.
520 WR2A Address FFB2 : DAC Input Data port
| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U8T and U8S on the TGP board.
530 WR3A Address FFB3 : DAC Input Data Port
| I/O Port Read/Write Response Check, U8R and U8Q on the TGP board.
540 P0 Gantry Processor I/O Port, P0 Read/Write Response Check.
| I/O Port Refer to Table 3–9 of this section for Bit Assignment.
547 Response Check
560 Time Base D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Time Base Counter Function.
Counter Check D Interval Timer repeat period 10.9 msec.
D Error Indication:
561 DAS Trigger D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Pulse Generator Function.
Pulse Generator D Checks Gantry Processor Internal Counter Function.
and
DAS Trigger D Pulse Generator generates DAS trigger pulse.
Counter Function Internal Counter counts DAS trigger.
Check D If Counter does not count up 64 pulses within 1sec, Gantry Processor indicates
Error.
D Time Base Counter is used as a WATCHDOG TIMER.
D Error Indication:
3–20 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
Table 3–10 Gantry Processor Sequential Function Test (continued)

Number
570 Collimator D Check Collimator Drive Function and Position Sending.
| Response Check D Move Aperture as the following sequence and check response.
589 If aperture does not respond to command properly,
Gantry Processor indicates Error and Stop Test.
Aperture Movement Sequence
9 11
7 13
1 2 3
1 mm 3 mm 5 mm 10 mm
6 5 4
8 12
10
Test No. Test

570 → 1mm 19
571 1mm → 3mm
572 3mm → 5mm 16 17
573 5mm → 10mm 1 mm 3 mm 5 mm 10 mm
574 10mm → 5mm
575 5mm → 3mm 15 18
576 3mm → 1mm
577 1mm → 5mm 14
578 5mm → 1mm
579 1mm → 10mm 1 : Test No. 571 6 : Test No. 576 11 : Test No. 581 16 : Test No. 586
583 3mm → 10mm 5 : Test No. 575 10 : Test No. 580 15 : Test No. 585
584 10mm → 2mm
585 2mm → 1mm (Example of Error)
586 1mm → 2mm Example of Movement
587 2mm → 5mm 5mm → 10mm
588 5mm → 2mm
589 2mm → 10mm
3–21 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure, before starting this test.
D Switch OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Scan’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
D Set TGP service switches to OFF/SVE/SLOW/HOME position.
D Switch OFF the HV and Rotor Control circuit breaker.
D Insert the azimuth lock pin.
1. Set S6 and S7 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to ‘ON’ position.
means the output port bits are all OFF.
3. Press ‘TEST A’ switch on the TGP board to start test.
Test Number Bit Status of Port
4. Set the I/O Port:

Example : Set Bit0 and Bit3 to High.
(i.e., Set CCW/HOME/CW switch to CW position, Set FAST/MID/SLOW switch to FAST position)
Bit7 Bit5 Bit3 Bit1

SYS ABT FAST CCW

Bit6:0 Bit4:0 Bit2:0 Bit0:1 MNL FIX SLOW CW
0 0 2 1 Bit6 Bit4 Bit2 Bit0
3–22 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-2-3 I/O Port Bit Check (continued)

5. To select the next test, press the TEST A switch.
6. To select test 610, press the TEST A switch once again.

7. The test number increases each time you press the TEST B switch until it reaches 650.
The test number loops back to 600 after 650.
If set data and read data are not same, error is indicated on the Gantry Display as follows:
8. To exit this Test Mode: Move S6 and S7 to OFF position, then press RESET switch.
Table 3–11 I/O Port Bit Check Program (Gantry Processor)

Number
600 WR0A Address FFB0 : Positioning Light and Scan Control Port
610 WR1A Address FFB1 : Status LED Control Port
620 WR2A Address FFB2 :DAC Input Data port
630 WR3A Address FFB3 : DAC Input Data Port
640 Gantry Processor P0 Port Gantry Processor Output Port P0, Bit Set/Clear Test
Bit Set/Clear Test Refer to Table 3–9 for Bit Assignment.
650 Collimator Set Test Set Aperture Response Error (Example)
Bit0 select → 1mm set
Shows that the position sensor
of 1mm and 3mm are ON.
(Bit5 ∼ Bit7 → Not used)
3–23 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
3-2-4 Gantry Processor Bit Table
Table 3–12 Gantry Processor Bit Table
Port Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P0
(out) INTERC B APTPLS APTRST BRK SVE CW/CCW SPD2 SPD1
P1
(in) S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
P2 TSCAN OGCOM OGCOM COMINT HOME TEST A
(IN) (SIO) (SIO) (INTR) (INTR) (INTR)
P3 GTRG POSL DTRIG CCWPLS CWPLS
(PLS) (IN) (counter) (counter) (counter)
3–24 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR
4-1 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
4-1-1 Flow Chart
Illustration 4–1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. 2108990)
Motor won’t Rotate
Any Alarm on LED of Yes Refer to Servo Alarm of this

Servo Amp. section.
No
Check Signal Cable from TGP

to Servo Amp.
Is Voltage Command at No Check TGP Board.

Vout–AGND of TGP
Yes
SVE Signal OK ? No
(i.e., +24V–U8Y5pin of TGP) Check TGP Board.
Yes
Replace Servo Amp.
4–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
4-1-1 Flow Chart (continued)
Illustration 4–2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart (For Servo Amp. P9153SF)
Motor won’t Rotate
Any Alarm on LED of Yes Refer to Servo Alarm of this

Servo Amp. section.
No
Is Voltage Command No D Check TGP Board.

at CN1 3–4 ? D Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.
Yes
RSGO Signal OK ? No D Check TGP Board.

(i.e., CN1 21–25 Closed) D Check Signal Cable from TGP to Servo Amp.
Yes
Check Fuses OK ? No Replace Fuse(s).
Yes
Replace Servo Amp.
4–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
4-1-2 Servo Alarm

The following descriptions comprise the troubleshooting guide for the Servo Alarm indicated on the Servo Alarm LED
of Servo Amp.
For Servo Amp. 2108990
LED Case Cause Action

OFF AC Power is not supplied to the driver. Check if wire harnesses are open.
– SV–ON signal is not supplied. Check if wire harnesses are open.
0 Turn ON then or remove the JSW2–1
F–LMT and R–LMT signals are not ON jumper.
1 At power–ON Faulty driver control circuit Replace Servo Amp.
At SV–ON Short circuit between motor wire har- Replace Motor.
nesses
Faulty driver power amp. Replace Servo Amp.
When the motor starts to rotate or de- Driver mis–adjustment
celerate
2 At SV–ON (Motor shaft is vibrated) Servo Amp. mis–adjustment Replace Servo Amp.
When the motor starts to rotate or de- Overload for rotation section Check if a material is contacted with
celerate Gantry rotating section.
Locked motor shaft Check motor (Is mechanical brake
applied ?)
At SV–ON (Motor shaft is not vi- Mis–connection of encoder signal cir- Replace Servo Amp.
brated.) cuit
3 When the motor starts to rotate or de- Overshot of step response Replace Servo Amp.
celerate
5 When power is applied Mis–connection inside the driver Replace Servo Amp.
After performing control operation Overheat inside the driver Check scan room temperature, then
replace Servo Amp.
6 When power is applied Open circuit of encoder signal wire Check CN2 connector.
When Gantry rotates slightly after Mis–connection of CN2 and TB2 Check CN2 connector and TB2
power ON and SV–ON (U,V,W) (U,V,W) terminals.
Abnormal encoder signal Replace Motor.
7 After SV–ON signal is input Alarm signal of regenerative board is not After Scan and Table/Tilt switches
connected, or power is not applied to re- are turned On, Control switch is ON.
generative board. Then check if wires (R,S,T) are con-
nected properly to TB2.
Fuse(s) is burn. Replace fuse(s) of the Servo Amp.
front panel, or replace Servo Amp.
When motor starts to decelerate Abnormal regenerative board Replace Servo Amp.
8 After SV–ON signal is input The fuse of the driver board is burn. Replace Servo Amp.
= Abnormal driver control circuit Replace Servo Amp.
4–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
4-1-2 Servo Alarm (continued)
For Servo Amp. P9153SF
1 O.C. (OVER CURRENT)

a. Motor winding short circuit ? → Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded ? → Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor ? → Replace servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
2 O.L. (OVER LOAD)
a. Gantry mechanical Failure ? → Check Gantry.
b. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
c. Communication Sensor of motor ? → Replace Motor.
3 O.H. (OVER HEAT)
a. Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
4 F.E. (CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF)
a. Motor winding short circuit ? → Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded ? → Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor ? → Re;ace Servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
5 P.E. (DYNAMIC BRAKE FUNCTION FAIL)
a. Dynamic Brake Resistors open ? → Check Dynamic Brake Resistors.
b. Input Voltage too high ? → Check Input Voltage.
6 S.E. (SPEED ERROR)
a. VR2 ADJUSTMENT ? → Check and Adjust VR2.
b. VOLTAGE COMMAND ? → Check Voltage Command from TGP.
c. TACO GEN Signal Connection ? → Check TACO GEN Signal Cable.
d. TACO GEN Fail ? → Replace Motor.
7 V.E. (VOLTAGE ERROR POWER FAIL)
a. Input Voltage drop (170 VAC)? → Check Input Voltage.
b. Bad Connection of Input Lead ? → Check Cable Connection.
c. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
8 C.E. (COMMUNICATION ERROR)
a. Control Circuit of Servo Amp. ? → Replace Servo Amp.
b. Signal Connection between Servo Amp. and Motor ? → Check Cable Connection.
c. Communication Sensor of Motor ? → Replace Motor.
4–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
4-1-3 Resetting the Servo Alarm

To reset the Servo Alarm displayed on the Servo Amp. LED, press the reset button as show in illustration below.
Illustration 4–3 Location of Reset Button
Servo Amp.
TGP Board
Reset Button
(P9153SF Servo Amp. Only)
SUB Board
Reset Button
(2108947 SUB Board Only)
4–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
4-2 SIGNAL CHECK POINT OF SERVO AMP. (P9153SF)
Table 4–2 Test Point of Servo Amp.
Test Point Function Description

15G Ground ± 15VDC Power Ground
+15 +15VDC Control Power +15V ± 0.3VDC
–15 –15VDC Control Power –15V ± 0.3VDC
+24 +24VDC Control Power +24V ± 20%
+12 +12VDC +12VDC : +12V ± 20%
12G Ground +12VDC Power Ground
TP8 Voltage Command Voltage Command Signal 6V/1,000rpm
VTG TACH. VOLTAGE Output of TACHO. GEN Feedback Loop Amp.
4.5V ± 0.5V / 1,000rpm
Gantry CCW Rotation : Positive
Gantry CW Rotation : Negative
IA Current Monitor Output of Current Monitor Amp.
0.2V/A ± 5.0%
A Communication Sensor Output Communication Sensor Output : Phase A
Signal Monitor
B Communication Sensor Output : Phase B
C Communication Sensor Output : Phase C
CK Clock Pulse Clock Pulse (Basic Clock)
0.9mHz ± 0.2mHz
TP1 Pulse Width Modulation Signal Pulse Width Modulation Signal for Inverter
TP2 1kHz ∼ 2kHz
4–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2242063
DAS / DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – DETECTOR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
SECTION 2 – IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECTOR RELATED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 ARTIFACT PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
i DAS/DETECTOR
blank 2242063
ii DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 1 – DETECTOR CHANNEL
1-1 DETECTOR CHANNEL ARRAY

The active and reference channels are connected the DAS. The ground channels are both ground and connected
to the DAS. The 32 reference channels are divided into two groups of 6 channels each. The channels of each group
are connected in parallel, so they produce 2 reference signals, one from each group of 16 reference channels. The
reference signals are used to apply corrections to the acquired x–ray view data.
4 16 1 635 1 16 4
GND Ref. Channels Active Channels Ref. Channels GND
635 321
636 637
(16ch. COMMON) (16ch. COMMON)
1–1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART

Table shows the DAS Channel – Ring Diameter cross references. Refer to the description below.
CH# : Channel Number

CN# : Connector Number
AR# : Pin Array (A ∼ D)
PN# : Pin Number from left side (1 ∼ 25)
FR# : Flexible printed circuit Number
BR# : Branch Number of each FPC
DA# : Amplifier Number of CAM and NCAM boards
#1 :Unit Number #1 of CAM Board #1
#10 :Unit Number #2 of CAM Board #2
DIA (cm) Diameter of image ring artifact in cm
PN#
1 2 3 4 23 24 25
AR# A
B
C
D
1–2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
1-2 DETECTOR CHANNEL – RING DIAMETER CHART (continued)
Table 1–1 Ring Diameter Chart
CH# CN# AR# PN# FR# BR# DA# DIA (cm) CH# CN# AR# PN# FR# BR# DA# DIA (cm)
1 1 A 2 1 7 1 42.72 56 1 C 16 2 5 3 35.63
2 1 D 3 1 7 1 42.59 57 1 A 16 2 6 3 35.50
3 1 B 3 1 7 1 42.46 58 1 D 17 2 6 3 35.37
4 1 C 3 1 7 1 42.34 59 1 B 17 2 6 3 35.24
5 1 A 3 1 8 1 42.21 60 1 C 17 2 6 3 35.11
6 1 D 4 1 8 1 42.03 61 1 A 17 2 7 3 34.98
7 1 B 4 1 8 1 41.96 62 1 D 18 2 7 3 34.85
8 1 C 4 1 8 1 41.83 63 1 B 18 2 7 3 34.72
9 1 A 4 1 9 1 41.70 64 1 C 18 2 7 3 34.59
10 1 D 5 1 9 1 41.57 65 1 A 18 2 8 3 34.45
11 1 B 5 1 9 1 41.46 66 1 D 19 2 8 4 34.32
12 1 C 5 1 9 1 41.32 67 1 B 19 2 8 4 34.19
13 1 A 5 1 10 1 41.19 68 1 C 19 2 8 4 34.06
14 1 D 6 1 10 1 41.06 69 1 A 19 2 9 4 33.93
15 1 B 6 1 10 1 40.93 70 1 D 20 2 9 4 33.80
16 1 C 6 1 10 1 40.81 71 1 B 20 2 9 4 33.67
17 1 A 6 1 11 1 40.63 72 1 C 20 2 9 4 33.53
18 1 D 7 1 11 1 40.55 73 1 A 20 2 10 4 33.40
19 1 B 7 1 11 1 40.42 74 1 D 21 2 10 4 33.27
20 1 C 7 1 11 1 40.29 75 1 B 21 2 10 4 33.14
21 1 A 7 1 12 1 40.17 76 1 C 21 2 10 4 33.01
22 1 D 8 1 12 2 40.04 77 1 A 21 2 11 4 32.88
23 1 B 8 1 12 2 39.91 78 1 D 22 2 11 4 32.74
24 1 C 8 1 12 2 39.78 79 1 B 22 2 11 4 32.61
25 1 A 8 1 13 2 39.65 80 1 C 22 2 11 4 32.48
26 1 D 9 1 13 2 39.52 81 1 A 22 2 12 4 32.35
27 1 B 9 1 13 2 39.39 82 1 D 23 2 12 4 32.22
28 1 C 9 1 13 2 39.27 83 1 B 23 2 12 4 32.08
29 1 A 9 1 14 2 39.14 84 1 C 23 2 12 4 31.95
30 1 D 10 1 14 2 39.01 85 1 A 23 2 13 4 31.82
31 1 B 10 1 14 2 38.83 86 1 D 24 2 13 4 31.69
32 1 C 10 1 14 2 38.75 87 1 B 24 2 13 4 31.55
33 1 A 10 1 15 2 38.62 88 2 C 2 2 13 5 31.42
34 1 D 11 1 15 2 38.49 89 2 A 2 2 14 5 31.29
35 1 B 11 1 15 2 38.35 90 2 D 3 2 14 5 31.16
36 1 C 11 1 15 2 38.23 91 2 B 3 2 14 5 31.02
37 1 A 11 2 1 2 38.10 92 2 C 3 2 14 5 30.89
38 1 D 12 2 1 2 37.97 93 2 A 3 2 15 5 30.76
39 1 B 12 2 1 2 37.84 94 2 D 4 2 15 5 30.63
40 1 C 12 2 1 2 37.72 95 2 B 4 2 15 5 30.49
41 1 A 12 2 2 2 37.59 96 2 C 4 2 15 5 30.36
42 1 D 13 2 2 2 37.46 97 2 A 4 2 16 5 30.23
43 1 B 13 2 2 2 37.33 98 2 D 5 2 16 5 30.09
44 1 C 13 2 2 3 37.20 99 2 B 5 2 16 5 29.96
45 1 A 13 2 3 3 37.07 100 2 C 5 2 16 5 29.83
46 1 D 14 2 3 3 36.94 101 2 A 5 2 17 5 29.69
47 1 B 14 2 3 3 36.81 102 2 D 6 2 17 5 29.56
48 1 C 14 2 3 3 36.63 103 2 B 6 2 17 5 29.43
49 1 A 14 2 4 3 36.55 104 2 C 6 2 17 5 29.29
50 1 D 15 2 4 3 36.42 105 2 A 6 2 18 5 29.16
51 1 B 15 2 4 3 36.29 106 2 D 7 2 18 5 29.03
52 1 C 15 2 4 3 36.16 107 2 B 7 2 18 5 28.89
53 1 A 15 2 5 3 36.02 108 2 C 7 2 18 5 28.76
54 1 D 16 2 5 3 35.89 109 2 A 7 2 19 5 28.63
55 1 B 16 2 5 3 35.76 110 2 D 8 2 19 6 28.49
1–3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
Table 1–1 Ring Diameter Chart (continued)
111 2 B 8 2 19 6 28.36 166 2 D 22 3 13 8 20.94
112 2 C 8 2 19 6 28.23 167 2 B 22 3 13 8 20.80
113 2 A 8 2 20 6 28.09 168 2 C 22 3 13 8 20.66
114 2 D 9 2 20 6 27.96 169 2 A 22 3 14 8 20.53
115 2 B 9 2 20 6 27.82 170 2 D 23 3 14 8 20.39
116 2 C 9 2 20 6 27.69 170 2 B 23 3 14 8 20.25
117 2 A 9 3 1 6 27.56 172 2 C 23 3 14 8 20.12
118 2 D 10 3 1 6 27.42 173 2 A 23 3 15 8 19.98
119 2 B 10 3 1 6 27.29 174 2 D 24 3 15 8 19.85
120 2 C 10 3 1 6 27.15 175 2 B 24 3 15 8 19.71
121 2 A 10 3 2 6 27.02 176 3 C 2 3 15 9 19.57
122 2 D 11 3 2 6 26.89 177 3 A 2 3 16 9 19.44
123 2 B 11 3 2 6 26.75 178 3 D 3 3 16 9 19.30
124 2 C 11 3 2 6 26.62 179 3 B 3 3 16 9 19.16
125 2 A 11 3 3 6 26.48 180 3 C 3 3 16 9 19.03
126 2 D 12 3 3 6 26.35 180 3 A 3 3 17 9 18.89
127 2 B 12 3 3 6 26.21 182 3 D 4 3 17 9 18.75
128 2 C 12 3 3 6 26.08 183 3 B 4 3 17 9 18.62
129 2 A 12 3 4 6 25.94 184 3 C 4 3 17 9 18.48
130 2 D 13 3 4 6 25.81 185 3 A 4 3 18 9 18.34
131 2 B 13 3 4 6 25.68 186 3 D 5 3 18 9 18.21
132 2 C 13 3 4 7 25.54 187 3 B 5 3 18 9 18.07
133 2 A 13 3 5 7 25.41 188 3 C 5 3 18 9 17.93
134 2 D 14 3 5 7 25.27 189 3 A 5 3 19 9 17.80
135 2 B 14 3 5 7 25.14 190 3 D 6 3 19 9 17.66
136 2 C 14 3 5 7 25.00 191 3 B 6 3 19 9 17.52
137 2 A 14 3 6 7 24.87 192 3 C 6 3 19 9 17.39
138 2 D 15 3 6 7 24.73 193 3 A 6 3 20 9 17.25
139 2 B 15 3 6 7 24.60 194 3 D 7 3 20 9 17.11
140 2 C 15 3 6 7 24.46 195 3 B 7 3 20 9 16.97
141 2 A 15 3 7 7 24.33 196 3 C 7 3 20 9 16.84
142 2 D 16 3 7 7 24.19 197 3 A 7 4 1 9 16.70
143 2 B 16 3 7 7 24.06 198 3 D 8 4 1 10 16.56
144 2 C 16 3 7 7 23.92 199 3 B 8 4 1 10 16.43
145 2 A 16 3 8 7 23.79 200 3 C 8 4 1 10 16.29
146 2 D 17 3 8 7 23.65 201 3 A 8 4 2 10 16.15
147 2 B 17 3 8 7 23.51 202 3 D 9 4 2 10 16.01
148 2 C 17 3 8 7 23.38 203 3 B 9 4 2 10 15.83
149 2 A 17 3 9 7 23.24 204 3 C 9 4 2 10 15.74
150 2 D 18 3 9 7 23.11 205 3 A 9 4 3 10 15.60
151 2 B 18 3 9 7 22.97 206 3 D 10 4 3 10 15.46
152 2 C 18 3 9 7 22.84 207 3 B 10 4 3 10 15.33
153 2 A 18 3 10 7 22.70 208 3 C 10 4 3 10 15.19
154 2 D 19 3 10 8 22.57 209 3 A 10 4 4 10 15.05
155 2 B 19 3 10 8 22.43 210 3 D 11 4 4 10 14.92
156 2 C 19 3 10 8 22.29 211 3 B 11 4 4 10 14.73
157 2 A 19 3 11 8 22.16 212 3 C 11 4 4 10 14.64
158 2 D 20 3 11 8 22.02 213 3 A 11 4 5 10 14.50
159 2 B 20 3 11 8 21.89 214 3 D 12 4 5 10 14.36
160 2 C 20 3 11 8 21.75 215 3 B 12 4 5 10 14.23
161 2 A 20 3 12 8 21.62 216 3 C 12 4 5 10 14.09
162 2 D 21 3 12 8 21.48 217 3 A 12 4 6 10 13.95
163 2 B 21 3 12 8 21.34 218 3 D 13 4 6 10 13.81
164 2 C 21 3 12 8 21.21 219 3 B 13 4 6 10 13.68
165 2 A 21 3 13 8 21.07 220 3 C 13 4 6 11 13.54
1–4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
221 3 A 13 4 7 11 13.40 276 4 C 5 4 20 13 5.80
222 3 D 14 4 7 11 13.26 277 4 A 5 5 1 13 5.66
223 3 B 14 4 7 11 13.13 278 4 D 6 5 1 13 5.52
224 3 C 14 4 7 11 12.99 279 4 B 6 5 1 13 5.38
225 3 A 14 4 8 11 12.85 280 4 C 6 5 1 13 5.24
226 3 D 15 4 8 11 12.71 281 4 A 6 5 2 13 5.10
227 3 B 15 4 8 11 12.57 282 4 D 7 5 2 13 4.96
228 3 C 15 4 8 11 12.44 283 4 B 7 5 2 13 4.82
229 3 A 15 4 9 11 12.30 284 4 C 7 5 2 13 4.69
230 3 D 16 4 9 11 12.16 285 4 A 7 5 3 13 4.55
231 3 B 16 4 9 11 12.02 286 4 D 8 5 3 14 4.41
232 3 C 16 4 9 11 11.88 287 4 B 8 5 3 14 4.27
233 3 A 16 4 10 11 11.75 288 4 C 8 5 3 14 4.13
234 3 D 17 4 10 11 11.61 289 4 A 8 5 4 14 3.99
235 3 B 17 4 10 11 11.47 290 4 D 9 5 4 14 3.85
236 3 C 17 4 10 11 11.33 291 4 B 9 5 4 14 3.71
237 3 A 17 4 11 11 11.19 292 4 C 9 5 4 14 3.58
238 3 D 18 4 11 11 11.06 293 4 A 9 5 5 14 3.44
239 3 B 18 4 11 11 10.92 294 4 D 10 5 5 14 3.30
240 3 C 18 4 11 11 10.78 295 4 B 10 5 5 14 3.16
241 3 A 18 4 12 11 10.64 296 4 C 10 5 5 14 3.02
242 3 D 19 4 12 12 10.50 297 4 A 10 5 6 14 2.88
243 3 B 19 4 12 12 10.37 298 4 D 11 5 6 14 2.74
244 3 C 19 4 12 12 10.23 299 4 B 11 5 6 14 2.60
245 3 A 19 4 13 12 10.09 300 4 C 11 5 6 14 2.47
246 3 D 20 4 13 12 9.95 301 4 A 11 5 7 14 2.33
247 3 B 20 4 13 12 9.81 302 4 D 12 5 7 14 2.19
248 3 C 20 4 13 12 9.67 303 4 B 12 5 7 14 2.05
249 3 A 20 4 14 12 9.54 304 4 C 12 5 7 14 1.91
250 3 D 21 4 14 12 9.40 305 4 A 12 5 8 14 1.77
251 3 B 21 4 14 12 9.26 306 4 D 13 5 8 14 1.63
252 3 C 21 4 14 12 9.12 307 4 B 13 5 8 14 1.49
253 3 A 21 4 15 12 8.98 308 4 C 13 5 8 15 1.35
254 3 D 22 4 15 12 8.84 309 4 A 13 5 9 15 1.22
255 3 B 22 4 15 12 8.71 310 4 D 14 5 9 15 1.08
256 3 C 22 4 15 12 8.57 311 4 B 14 5 9 15 0.94
257 3 A 22 4 16 12 8.43 312 4 C 14 5 9 15 0.80
258 3 D 23 4 16 12 8.29 313 4 A 14 5 10 15 0.66
259 3 B 23 4 16 12 8.15 314 4 D 15 5 10 15 0.52
260 3 C 23 4 16 12 8.01 315 4 B 15 5 10 15 0.38
261 3 A 23 4 17 12 7.87 316 4 C 15 5 10 15 0.24
262 3 D 24 4 17 12 7.74 317 4 A 15 5 11 15 0.10
263 3 B 24 4 17 12 7.60 318 4 D 16 5 11 15 0.03
264 4 C 2 4 17 13 7.46 319 4 B 16 5 11 15 0.17
265 4 A 2 4 18 13 7.32 320 4 C 16 5 11 15 0.31
266 4 D 3 4 18 13 7.18 321 4 A 16 5 12 15 0.45
267 4 B 3 4 18 13 7.04 322 4 D 17 5 12 15 0.59
268 4 C 3 4 18 13 6.90 323 4 B 17 5 12 15 0.73
269 4 A 3 4 19 13 6.77 324 4 C 17 5 12 15 0.87
270 4 D 4 4 19 13 6.63 325 4 A 17 5 13 15 1.01
271 4 B 4 4 19 13 6.49 326 4 D 18 5 13 15 1.15
272 4 C 4 4 19 13 6.35 327 4 B 18 5 13 15 1.28
273 4 A 4 4 20 13 6.21 328 4 C 18 5 13 15 1.42
274 4 D 5 4 20 13 6.07 329 4 A 18 5 14 15 1.56
275 4 B 5 4 20 13 5.93 330 4 D 19 5 14 16 1.70
1–5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
331 4 B 19 5 14 16 1.84 386 5 D 11 6 8 18 9.47
332 4 C 19 5 14 16 1.98 387 5 B 11 6 8 18 9.60
333 4 A 19 5 15 16 2.12 388 5 C 11 6 8 18 9.74
334 4 D 20 5 15 16 2.26 389 5 A 11 6 9 18 9.88
335 4 B 20 5 15 16 2.40 390 5 D 12 6 9 18 10.02
336 4 C 20 5 15 16 2.53 391 5 B 12 6 9 18 10.16
337 4 A 20 5 16 16 2.67 392 5 C 12 6 9 18 10.30
338 4 D 21 5 16 16 2.81 393 5 A 12 6 10 18 10.43
339 4 B 21 5 16 16 2.95 394 5 D 13 6 10 18 10.57
340 4 C 21 5 16 16 3.09 395 5 B 13 6 10 18 10.71
341 4 A 21 5 17 16 3.23 396 5 C 13 6 10 19 10.85
342 4 D 22 5 17 16 3.37 397 5 A 13 6 11 19 10.99
343 4 B 22 5 17 16 3.51 398 5 D 14 6 11 19 11.13
344 4 C 22 5 17 16 3.65 399 5 B 14 6 11 19 11.26
345 4 A 22 5 18 16 3.78 400 5 C 14 6 11 19 11.40
346 4 D 23 5 18 16 3.92 401 5 A 14 6 12 19 11.54
347 4 B 23 5 18 16 4.06 402 5 D 15 6 12 19 11.68
348 4 C 23 5 18 16 4.20 403 5 B 15 6 12 19 11.82
349 4 A 23 5 19 16 4.34 404 5 C 15 6 12 19 11.95
350 4 D 24 5 19 16 4.48 405 5 A 15 6 13 19 12.09
351 4 B 24 5 19 16 4.62 406 5 D 16 6 13 19 12.23
352 5 C 2 5 19 17 4.76 407 5 B 16 6 13 19 12.37
353 5 A 2 5 20 17 4.89 408 5 C 16 6 13 19 12.51
354 5 D 3 5 20 17 5.03 409 5 A 16 6 14 19 12.64
355 5 B 3 5 20 17 5.17 410 5 D 17 6 14 19 12.78
356 5 C 3 5 20 17 5.31 411 5 B 17 6 14 19 12.92
357 5 A 3 6 1 17 5.45 412 5 C 17 6 14 19 13.06
358 5 D 4 6 1 17 5.59 413 5 A 17 6 15 19 13.19
359 5 B 4 6 1 17 5.73 414 5 D 18 6 15 19 13.33
360 5 C 4 6 1 17 5.87 415 5 B 18 6 15 19 13.47
361 5 A 4 6 2 17 6.00 416 5 C 18 6 15 19 13.61
362 5 D 5 6 2 17 6.14 417 5 A 18 6 16 19 13.75
363 5 B 5 6 2 17 6.23 418 5 D 19 6 16 20 13.88
364 5 C 5 6 2 17 6.42 419 5 B 19 6 16 20 14.02
365 5 A 5 6 3 17 6.56 420 5 C 19 6 16 20 14.16
366 5 D 6 6 3 17 6.70 421 5 A 19 6 17 20 14.30
367 5 B 6 6 3 17 6.84 422 5 D 20 6 17 20 14.43
368 5 C 6 6 3 17 6.97 423 5 B 20 6 17 20 14.57
369 5 A 6 6 4 17 7.11 424 5 C 20 6 17 20 14.71
370 5 D 7 6 4 17 7.25 425 5 A 20 6 18 20 14.85
371 5 B 7 6 4 17 7.39 426 5 D 21 6 18 20 14.98
372 5 C 7 6 4 17 7.53 427 5 B 21 6 18 20 15.12
373 5 A 7 6 5 17 7.67 428 5 C 21 6 18 20 15.26
374 5 D 8 6 5 18 7.81 429 5 A 21 6 19 20 15.40
375 5 B 8 6 5 18 7.94 430 5 D 22 6 19 20 15.53
376 5 C 8 6 5 18 8.08 431 5 B 22 6 19 20 15.67
377 5 A 8 6 6 18 8.22 432 5 C 22 6 19 20 15.81
378 5 D 9 6 6 18 8.36 433 5 A 22 6 20 20 15.95
379 5 B 9 6 6 18 8.50 434 5 D 23 6 20 20 16.08
380 5 C 9 6 6 18 8.64 435 5 B 23 6 20 20 16.22
381 5 A 9 6 7 18 8.77 436 5 C 23 6 20 20 16.36
382 5 D 10 6 7 18 8.91 437 5 A 23 7 1 20 16.49
383 5 B 10 6 7 18 9.05 438 5 D 24 7 1 20 16.63
384 5 C 10 6 7 18 9.19 439 5 B 24 7 1 20 16.77
385 5 A 10 6 8 18 9.33 440 6 C 2 7 1 21 16.91
1–6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
441 6 A 2 7 2 21 17.04 496 6 C 16 7 15 23 24.53
442 6 D 3 7 2 21 17.18 497 6 A 16 7 16 23 24.66
443 6 B 3 7 2 21 17.32 498 6 D 17 7 16 23 24.80
444 6 C 3 7 2 21 17.45 499 6 B 17 7 16 23 24.93
445 6 A 3 7 3 21 17.59 500 6 C 17 7 16 23 25.07
446 6 D 4 7 3 21 17.73 501 6 A 17 7 17 23 25.20
447 6 B 4 7 3 21 17.86 502 6 D 18 7 17 23 25.34
448 6 C 4 7 3 21 18.00 503 6 B 18 7 17 23 25.47
449 6 A 4 7 4 21 18.14 504 6 C 18 7 17 23 25.61
450 6 D 5 7 4 21 18.27 505 6 A 18 7 18 23 25.74
451 6 B 5 7 4 21 18.41 506 6 D 19 7 18 24 25.83
452 6 C 5 7 4 21 18.55 507 6 B 19 7 18 24 26.01
453 6 A 5 7 5 21 18.69 508 6 C 19 7 18 24 26.15
454 6 D 6 7 5 21 18.82 509 6 A 19 7 19 24 26.23
455 6 B 6 7 5 21 18.96 510 6 D 20 7 19 24 26.42
456 6 C 6 7 5 21 19.10 511 6 B 20 7 19 24 26.55
457 6 A 6 7 6 21 19.23 512 6 C 20 7 19 24 26.63
458 6 D 7 7 6 21 19.37 513 6 A 20 7 20 24 26.82
459 6 B 7 7 6 21 19.50 514 6 D 21 7 20 24 26.95
460 6 C 7 7 6 21 19.64 515 6 B 21 7 20 24 27.09
461 6 A 7 7 7 21 19.78 516 6 C 21 7 20 24 27.22
462 6 D 8 7 7 22 19.91 517 6 A 21 8 1 24 27.36
463 6 B 8 7 7 22 20.05 518 6 D 22 8 1 24 27.49
464 6 C 8 7 7 22 20.19 519 6 B 22 8 1 24 27.62
465 6 A 8 7 8 22 20.32 520 6 C 22 8 1 24 27.76
466 6 D 9 7 8 22 20.46 521 6 A 22 8 2 24 27.89
467 6 B 9 7 8 22 20.60 522 6 D 23 8 2 24 28.02
468 6 C 9 7 8 22 20.73 523 6 B 23 8 2 24 28.16
469 6 A 9 7 9 22 20.87 524 6 C 23 8 2 24 28.29
470 6 D 10 7 9 22 21.00 525 6 A 23 8 3 24 28.43
471 6 B 10 7 9 22 21.14 526 6 D 24 8 3 24 28.56
472 6 C 10 7 9 22 21.28 527 6 B 24 8 3 24 28.69
473 6 A 10 7 10 22 21.41 528 7 C 2 8 3 25 28.83
474 6 D 11 7 10 22 21.55 529 7 A 2 8 4 25 28.96
475 6 B 11 7 10 22 21.68 530 7 D 3 8 4 25 29.09
476 6 C 11 7 10 22 21.82 531 7 B 3 8 4 25 29.23
477 6 A 11 7 11 22 21.96 532 7 C 3 8 4 25 29.36
478 6 D 12 7 11 22 22.09 533 7 A 3 8 5 25 29.49
479 6 B 12 7 11 22 22.23 534 7 D 4 8 5 25 29.63
480 6 C 12 7 11 22 22.36 535 7 B 4 8 5 25 29.76
481 6 A 12 7 12 22 22.50 536 7 C 4 8 5 25 29.89
482 6 D 13 7 12 22 22.63 537 7 A 4 8 6 25 30.03
483 6 B 13 7 12 22 22.77 538 7 D 5 8 6 25 30.16
484 6 C 13 7 12 23 22.91 539 7 B 5 8 6 25 30.29
485 6 A 13 7 13 23 23.04 540 7 C 5 8 6 25 30.43
486 6 D 14 7 13 23 23.18 541 7 A 5 8 7 25 30.56
487 6 B 14 7 13 23 23.31 542 7 D 6 8 7 25 30.69
488 6 C 14 7 13 23 23.45 543 7 B 6 8 7 25 30.82
489 6 A 14 7 14 23 23.58 544 7 C 6 8 7 25 30.96
490 6 D 15 7 14 23 23.72 545 7 A 6 8 8 25 31.09
491 6 B 15 7 14 23 23.85 546 7 D 7 8 8 25 31.28
492 6 C 15 7 14 23 23.99 547 7 B 7 8 8 25 31.36
493 6 A 15 7 15 23 24.12 548 7 C 7 8 8 25 31.49
494 6 D 16 7 15 23 24.26 549 7 A 7 8 9 25 31.62
495 6 B 16 7 15 23 24.39 550 7 D 8 8 9 26 31.75
1–7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
551 7 B 8 8 9 26 31.89 606 7 D 22 9 3 28 39.07
552 7 C 8 8 9 26 32.02 607 7 B 22 9 3 28 39.20
553 7 A 8 8 10 26 32.15 608 7 C 22 9 3 28 39.33
554 7 D 9 8 10 26 32.28 609 7 A 22 9 4 28 39.46
555 7 B 9 8 10 26 32.41 610 7 D 23 9 4 28 39.59
556 7 C 9 8 10 26 32.55 611 7 B 23 9 4 28 39.72
557 7 A 9 8 11 26 32.68 612 7 C 23 9 4 28 39.84
558 7 D 10 8 11 26 32.81 613 7 A 23 9 5 28 39.97
559 7 B 10 8 11 26 32.94 614 7 D 24 9 5 28 40.10
560 7 C 10 8 11 26 33.07 615 7 B 24 9 5 28 40.23
561 7 A 10 8 12 26 33.21 616 8 C 2 9 5 29 40.36
562 7 D 11 8 12 26 33.34 617 8 A 2 9 6 29 40.49
563 7 B 11 8 12 26 33.47 618 8 D 3 9 6 29 40.61
564 7 C 11 8 12 26 33.60 619 8 B 3 9 6 29 40.74
565 7 A 11 8 13 26 33.73 620 8 C 3 9 6 29 40.87
566 7 D 12 8 13 26 33.86 621 8 A 3 9 7 29 41.00
567 7 B 12 8 13 26 34.00 622 8 D 4 9 7 29 41.13
568 7 C 12 8 13 26 34.13 623 8 B 4 9 7 29 41.25
569 7 A 12 8 14 26 34.26 624 8 C 4 9 7 29 41.38
570 7 D 13 8 14 26 34.39 625 8 A 4 9 8 29 41.51
571 7 B 13 8 14 26 34.52 626 8 D 5 9 8 29 41.64
572 7 C 13 8 14 27 34.65 627 8 B 5 9 8 29 41.76
573 7 A 13 8 15 27 34.78 628 8 C 5 9 8 29 41.89
574 7 D 14 8 15 27 34.91 629 8 A 5 9 9 29 42.02
575 7 B 14 8 15 27 35.04 630 8 D 6 9 9 29 42.15
576 7 C 14 8 15 27 35.18 631 8 B 6 9 9 29 42.27
577 7 A 14 8 16 27 35.31 632 8 C 6 9 9 29 42.40
578 7 D 15 8 16 27 35.44 633 8 A 6 9 10 29 42.53
579 7 B 15 8 16 27 35.57 634 8 D 7 9 10 29 42.65
580 7 C 15 8 16 27 35.70 635 8 B 7 9 10 29 42.78
581 7 A 15 8 17 27 35.83 636 8 D 8 9 0 30 0.00
582 7 D 16 8 17 27 35.96 637 8 C 9 1 – 31 –
583 7 B 16 8 17 27 36.09
584 7 C 16 8 17 27 36.22
585 7 A 16 8 18 27 36.35
586 7 D 17 8 18 27 36.48
587 7 B 17 8 18 27 36.61
588 7 C 17 8 18 27 36.74
589 7 A 17 8 19 27 36.87
590 7 D 18 8 19 27 37.00
591 7 B 18 8 19 27 37.13
592 7 C 18 8 19 27 37.26
593 7 A 18 8 20 27 37.39
594 7 D 19 8 20 28 37.52
595 7 B 19 8 20 28 37.65
596 7 C 19 8 20 28 37.78
597 7 A 19 9 1 28 37.91
598 7 D 20 9 1 28 38.04
599 7 B 20 9 1 28 38.17
600 7 C 20 9 1 28 38.30
601 7 A 20 9 2 28 38.43
602 7 D 21 9 2 28 38.56
603 7 B 21 9 2 28 38.69
604 7 C 21 9 2 28 38.81
605 7 A 21 9 3 28 38.94
1–8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 2 – IMAGE PROBLEMS (DETECTOR RELATED)
2-1 ARTIFACT PROBLEM

The following illustrations are examples which may be caused by DAS component failure.
Single Channel Ring
The failure of one input capacitor or one Detector channel causes a single
Phantom failure . Illustration shows an example of single channel ring. To identify a
DAS channel, measure the ring diameter and use the ring diameter chart
(Section 1-2).
Single Channel Streak
If a single channel failure occurs during one view period, it appears as

Phantom single line on image (streak). To identify the DAS channel which caused this
streak, use the circle cursor to measure the distance from image center to
the streak, then use the ring diameter chart (Section 1-2) to determine the
DAS channel. This failure can also be caused by a single channel signal
view data drop during data conversion or data transfer.
22 Channel Wide Band
A unit conditioning circuit failure causes 22 channels to fail. Illustration

Phantom shows an example of a 22 Channel Wide Band Ring.
2–1 DAS/DETECTOR
blank 2242063
2–2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2242063
X–RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – FAILURE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-1 Power Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-2 INV Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-1-3 FIL Cont Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
i X–RAY GENERATOR
blank 2242063
ii X–RAY GENERATOR
REV 0 2242063
SECTION 1 – FAILURE ANALYSIS
1-1 LED INDICATORS
1-1-1 Power Cont Board

The Power Cont board contains 42 LEDs that provide XG system status and information. During XG system trouble-
shooting, some LEDs provide valuable information that speeds up the troubleshooting process.
The LEDs D1 ∼ D5 illuminates only during OFF–LINE exposure mode, that is, when the cable is connected between
CN15 and CN1. These LEDs display the XG system status during OFF–LINE exposure.
Illustration 1–1 LED Locations
D1 ∼ D5 POWER CONT Board
D14 ∼ D21
D22 ∼ D34
D35 ∼ D50
1–1 X–RAY GENERATOR

REV 0 2242063
1-1-1 Power Cont Board (continued)
XG FAIL D1 When OFF, it indicates that some failure(s) occurred in the XG system.
The failures it detects are:
D Over kv, Under kv, Over mA
D Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)
D Power Failure (+VCC, –VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)
D X–Ray Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW → INV CONT board)
D Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)
D Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17
D Exposure back–up timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)
POWER D2 The DC Power Supply for (+5V) POWER CONT board is normal.
XG ACT D3 (XG Active) The rotor is in operation.
XRY ON D4 (X–Ray ON) X–Ray is being emitted.
XG RDY D5 (XG Ready)
The rotor is running at the specified speed and HV ON command will be accepted.
HV ON D14 (High Voltage On) The high voltage output command is received from OC.
XG RDY D15 (XG Ready)
The rotor is running at the specified speed and the HV ON command will be accepted.
XG ON D16 (X–Ray Generator ON) The rotor start command is received from OC.
KV1 D17 KV selection code.
KV0 D18 KV selection code.
MA2 D19 mA selection code.
XG FAIL D22 This LED lights when the following failures are detected:
D Over kv, Under kv, Over mA
D Filament Overcurrent (detected on FIL CONT board)
D Power Failure (+VCC, –VCC; detected on FIL CONT board)
D X–Ray Tube Overheat (detected by thermal SW → INV CONT board)
D Rotor Overcurrent (detected on INV CONT board)
D Loose connection of CN5, CN8 or CN17
D Exposure back–up timer, etc. (detected by CPU board)
OVP4 D23 (Positive Side) Over KV is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.
OVN4 D24 (Negative Side) Over KV is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.
OVP1 D25 (Positive Side)
Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN6 is loosely connected.
OVN1 D26 (Negative Side)
Over KV (on the first stage of CW assemblies) is detected, or CN9 is loosely connected.
DVP4 D27 (Positive Side) Under KV is detected.
DVN4 D28 (Negative Side) Under KV is detected.
OLP D29 (Positive Side) Over mA is detected.
OLN D30 (Negative Side) Over mA is detected.

REV 0 2242063
1-1-1 Power Cont Board (continued)
OVH D31 (Over Heat) The overheat on the X–Ray Tube housing is detected.
ROT OC D32 (Rotor Overcurrent) The overcurrent for the rotor is detected.
FIL OC D33 (Filament Overcurrent) The Overcurrent for the heating transformer is detected.
POWER FAIL D34 The main D.C. power supply (+VCC, –VCC) failed (detected on FIL CONT board).
ST3 D35 (Status 3) Information code. (see Table 1–1)
PWR11 D39 (Power 11) Power reference code for the heating transformer.
Table 1–1 ST0 – ST3 Information
Error Messages LED Status

35 36 37 38
HV ON overtime (14.67sec / less than 100mA) f f f F
HV ON overtime (5.54sec / more than 100mA) f f F f
FIL3 switch does not match SOFT switch f f F F
80kV or 140kV can not be selected f F f f
RAM over error f F f F
RAM set error f F F f
RAM clear error f F F F
3 no answer (serial communication) F f f f
3 NACK (serial communication) F f f F
Hard error (serial communication) F f F f

REV 0 2242063
1-1-2 INV Cont Board
Illustration 1–2 LED Locations
INV CONT Board
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
The following LED descriptions apply when that LED lights (LED ON).
START LED1 The rotor start command is given from Power Cont board or or by the S11 switch (START)
HSPD LED2 (High Speed) The Power Cont board or the jumper J1 (HSPD) select high speed
mode. J1 is installed for HSPD mode.
ACC LED3 (Acceleration) The rotor is in acceleration.
RUN LED4 The rotor is running.
BRK LED5 (Brake) The rotor is in deceleration.
RUN RYL LED6 (Run Relay) Relay K8 is energized (supplies rotor power to the stator).
BRK RYL LED7 (Brake Relay) Relay K7 is energized (supplies deceleration power to the stator).
OC LED8 (Overcurrent) Overcurrent is detected in the rotor inverter output.
EXP INTL LED9 (Exposure Interlock) The rotor is running at the specified speed.

REV 0 2242063
1-1-3 FIL Cont Board
Illustration 1–3 LED Location
FIL CONT Board
D1
VCC D1 When OFF, it indicates the power failure (+VCC, –VCC).

blank 2242063

GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626

283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

CT Sytec Sytec I Series Advanced Diagnosics 2242063 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CT Sytec Sytec I Series Advanced Diagnosics 2242063 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical

Copyrighte 1999, 2002 by General Electric Company

Advanced Service Documentation

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

  

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLY – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – CLASS C SOFTWARE – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

SECTION 7 – IMAGE SPATIAL RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

D SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT

D SECTION 6 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

10. SUPPORT DISPLAY

11. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION

12. CT No. ADJUST

13. POST RECON

14. CUSTOM PARAMETERS

17. OD STUDY RECOVERY

18. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

19. SERVICE MODE

20. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)

*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

Insert the ‘BOOT’ disk into the floppy disk drive.

Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.

*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

2-1-1 Functions of Support Programs

D OFF–LINE SCAN ––– Collects Scan raw data

D TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ––– On–line control of Table and Gantry

D STATISTICS ––– Data statistics

D ALIGNMENT ––– X–ray alignment

D FD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

D MT DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

D MOD DUMP/LOAD ––– Transfers raw data files

D WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

D MTF SURVEY ––– Calculates the image spatial resolution

2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs

*** SUPPORT MENU ***

NEW PATIENT BLINKING

2-1-2 How to Use Support Programs (continued)

** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX

D The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.

2-2 OFF LINE SCAN

*** KIND OF SCAN ***

2-2 OFF LINE SCAN (continued)

Axial Scan (continued)

3. Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.

* MAINTENANCE MENU *

* MAINTENANCE MENU *

* SUPPORT MENU *

* KIND OF SCAN *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT *

* TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL *

* STATISTICS *

* KIND OF DATA *

* KIND OF DATA *

* DISPLAY/FILING *

* DISPLAY/FILING *

* ALIGNMENT *

* GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE *

* ISO CENTER CHANNEL *

* FILTER CENTER CHANNEL *